HANCOCK HOUSING COMMISSION CFP PROJECT Proposed …...BIDS - All bids shall be addressed to Ms. Sherry Hughes, Executive Director, Hancock Housing Commission, 1401 Quincy Street, Hancock,

HANCOCK HOUSING COMMISSION

CFP PROJECT

Proposed Elevator Addition

DEVELOPMENT NO. MI-063

H11-00359

Prepared by:

U.P. ENGINEERS & ARCHITECTS, INC.100 Portage Street

Houghton, MI 49931

Ken A. Dillinger, P.E.

August 2020

[H11-00359]

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1

SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division Section Title

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Invitation to BidInstruction to BiddersInstruction to Bidders for Contracts (HUD-5369)*Representations, Certifications and Other Statements of Bidders (HUD 5369A)*Certification for Contracts, Grants, Loans and Cooperative Agreements (BYRD Amendment)*Noncollusive Affidavit of Prime Bidder*Certificate of Non-Segregated Facilities*Bid for Lump Sum ContractsInstruction for Contractors Regarding Affirmative ActionUnder Executive Orders 11246 and 11914 (Form 7460.9)

Prevailing Wage RequirementsGeneral Conditions (HUD-5370EZ)Section 3 Contract Clause

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS01010 Summary of the Work01050 Field Engineering01310 Construction Schedule01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples01360 Lay Out in Buildings01370 Schedule of Values01545 Protection of Work and Property01600 Material and Equipment01700 Contract Closeout01710 Cleaning01720 Project Record Documents01740 Guarantees, Warranties, and Bonds

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS02 41 19 Selective Building Demolition

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete03 35 00 Concrete Finishing

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY04 05 03 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting04 20 16 Reinforced Unit Masonry04 20 19 Veneer Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 – METALS05 31 23 Steel Roof Decking05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

[H11-00359]

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION07 21 13 Board Insulation07 21 16 Blanket Insulation07 30 10 Roofing Underlayment07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels07 53 03 Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Fully Adhered07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim07 90 00 Joint Protection

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS08 12 13 Standard Hollow Metal Frames08 13 14 Standard Steel Doors08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors08 41 13 Aluminum-framed Entrances and Storefronts08 51 13 Aluminum Windows08 71 00 Door Hardware

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies09 65 00 Resilient Flooring09 68 13 Tile Carpeting09 90 00 Painting and Coating

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT14 21 00 Elevators and Lifts

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC23 07 00 HVAC Insulation23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL26 00 00 General Electrical Requirements

END TABLE OF CONTENTS

INVITATION TO BID

OWNER - The Hancock Housing Commission, Hancock, Michigan, acting through its Board ofCommissioners, hereby gives notice that sealed bids will be received at the Executive Director's office forthe following described project.

PROJECT - The work shall consist of CFP Projects.

1. Proposed Elevator Addition at Lakeview Manor

TIME - Sealed bids will be received until 2:00 p.m. local time, on Thursday, September 3, 2020, in theExecutive Director's office at 1401 Quincy Street, Hancock, Michigan at which time bids will be publiclyopened and read aloud.

SITE WALK-THRU Contractors can do a site investigation at 2:00 p.m., Thursday, August 20, 2020.Questions can be sent to [email protected] or call 906-250-4208.

BIDS - All bids shall be addressed to Ms. Sherry Hughes, Executive Director, Hancock HousingCommission, 1401 Quincy Street, Hancock, Michigan, 49930. Bids shall be sealed and shall have thename and address of the Bidder and the Contract for which the bid is being submitted on the outside of theenvelope. All Bidders shall bid in accordance with and upon the Bid Forms included in the ContractDocuments.

EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - The Contract Documents are on file for inspection at theExecutive Director's Office, Hancock, MI, Marquette Builder’s exchange and U.P. Engineers &Architects, Inc., 100 Portage Street, Houghton, MI.

BID SECURITY - No Bid shall be received unless accompanied by a certified check or satisfactory Bid Bondpayable to the Hancock Housing Commission in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the maximumbid as a guarantee, that if the Bid is accepted, the Bidder will execute and file the Contract, Assurance ofCompletion, and Insurance Certification, as required by the Contract Documents, within ten (10) days afterthe Notice of Award.

BID REJECTION - The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids or waive any informalities inbidding, and to award that which is in the best interest of the OWNER.

WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS - No Bid shall be withdrawn for a period of forty-five (45) days after the scheduledopening without the consent of the OWNER.

GOVERNING LAWS AND REGULATIONS - The Contractor shall be required to pay not less than the wagerates established for the project by the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.Copies of these wage rates are incorporated in the Contract Documents.Bidders will be required to comply with the Executive Order No. 11246, as amended. The requirements forbidders and contractors under this order are explained in the bid documents.A surety which secures a bond must be acceptable to the United States Government. U.S. TreasuryCircular No. 570 lists those sureties which are acceptable. This may be obtained by requesting it from:

Audit StaffBureau of Government Financial OperationsU.S. Treasury DepartmentWashington, D.C. 20226

The surety must also be licensed to do business in the State of Michigan.

Sherry Hughes, Executive DirectorHancock Housing CommissionHancock, Michigan 49930

PAGE 1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

A. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: One bid shall be submitted for all Base Bid listed on the bidform. The bid submitted shall include all costs of labor, materials and permits for the Work.Work items shall consist of the following:

1. Proposed Elevator Addition at the Hi Rise of Lakeview Manor

B. SUB-BIDS REQUIRED: The names of subcontractors shall be listed in the bid form.Sub-contractors prices shall be listed when indicated on the bid form.

C. EXAMINATION: Before submitting a bid, all General Contractors shall read all contractdocuments and drawings and shall attend mandatory walk-thru at the site of the proposed workto fully acquaint themselves with the condition relating to construction, labor, quality andquantity of work to be performed. The submission of a bid shall be construed as prima faciaevidence that the bidder has made such examination.

D. DISCREPANCIES - OMISSIONS: Should the bidder find discrepancies in or omissionsfrom the drawings or documents, or should be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at oncenotify the Engineer. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be responsible for any oral instructions.Instructions deemed necessary by the Engineer will be issued in the form of an addendum andshall become a part of the bid and contract.

E. BIDS: All bids shall be made out on blank forms provided and submitted in an opaqueenvelope.

Envelopes shall be marked with the Contractor's name and address.

The bid price shall be in writing and in figures and in case of conflict, the written shall apply.Only bids which are made out on the regular bid form, with insertions as required will beconsidered.

A list of attachments to the bid form is as follows:

1. Non-conclusive Affidavit2. Certificate of Non-Segregate Facilities3. Certification for Contractors, Grants, Loans and Cooperative Agreements.

F. REQUIREMENTS FOR SIGNING BIDS: Bids which are not signed by the individualmaking them should have attached thereto a power of attorney evidencing authority to sign thebid in the name of the person for whom it is signed.

Bids which are signed for a partnership should be signed by all of the partners or by anattorney-in-fact. If signed by an attorney-in-fact, there should be attached to the bid a power ofattorney evidencing authority to sign the bid, executed by the partners.

Bids which are signed for a corporation should have the correct corporation name thereof andthe signature of the president or other authorized officer of the corporation manually writtenbelow the corporate name following the word "By __________________________".If such a bid is signed by an official other than the president of the corporation, a certified copyof a resolution of the Board of Directors evidencing the authority of such official to sign the bid

PAGE 2

should be attached to it. Such bid should also bear the attesting signature of the secretary ofthe corporation and the impression of the corporate seal.

G. INSURANCE:

1. See Section 31 of HUD General Conditions.

2. Certificate of Insurance - Submit to Engineer indicating proof of insurance inamounts stipulated within ten days after the project has been awarded.

3. Certificate of Insurance for all contractors and sub-contractors to HancockHousing Commission.

H. LICENSING:

1. All Contractors shall be licensed Contractors for the State in which the work is tobe performed and shall provide evidence of same before signing of contracts as requiredby law.

I. LEAD BASED PAINT: Any Contractor awarded a contract for modernization shallcomply with 24 CFR Part 35 prohibiting the use of lead based paint.

Byrd Amendment Certification For Contracts,Grants, Loans And Cooperative Agreements

The undersigned certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief that:

(1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of theundersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee ofan agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of aMember of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of anyFederal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of a cooperative agreement, andthe extension, continuation, renewal, amendment or modification of any Federal contract,grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.

(2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid toany person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, aMember of Congress, An officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member ofCongress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, theundersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure Form to ReportLobbying," in accordance with its instructions.

(3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in theaward documents for all subawards at all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants, andcontracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certifyand disclose accordingly.

This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placedwhen this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisitefor making or entering into this transaction imposed by Section 1352, Title 31, U.S. Code. Anyperson who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of notless than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.

Executed this ___________ day of _____________, _____.

By _____________________________________(signature)

_____________________________________(typed or printed name)

_____________________________________(title, if any)

Covered Action: ______________________________________________(type and identity of program, project or activity)

AFFIDAVIT

(Prime Bidder)

State of as

County of ;

being first duly sworn, deposesand says:

That he is(Partner or office of the firm of, etc.)

the party making the foregoing bid, that such bid is genuine and notcollusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connivedor agreed, directly or indirectly with any bidder or person, to put in asham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directlyor indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication orconference, with any person, to fix the bid price of affiant or of anyother bidder, The Housing Commission listed on the project documents orany person interested in the proposed contract; and that all statementsin said bid are true.

Signature of:

Bidder, if the bidder is an individualPartner, if the bidder is a partnershipOfficer, if the bidder is a corporation

Subscribed and sworn to before me this

Day of , 20 .

My commission expires , 20 .

(To be included in bid)

CERTIFICATE OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES

The (__________________________________ Company) assures GOVERNMENTCONTRACTORS and CONCERNED FEDERAL AGENCIES that we do not and will notmaintain or provide for our employees any segregated facilities at any of ourestablishments, and that we do not and will not permit our employees to perform theirservices at any location, under our control, where segregate facilities are maintained.The company understands that the phrase “Segregated Facilities” includes facilitieswhich are, in fact, segregated on a basis of race, color, creed or national origin,because of habit, local custom or otherwise. The company understands and agrees thatmaintaining and providing segregated facilities for our employees or permitting ouremployees to perform their services at any locations, under our control, wheresegregated facilities are maintained is a violation of the equal opportunity clauserequired by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965.

The company further understands and agrees that a breach of the assurance hereincontained subjects us to the provisions of the Orders of the Secretary of Labor and theprovisions of the equal opportunity clause enumerated in contracts or referenced onpurchase orders by the Government or Government contractors.

Finally we are aware that whoever knowingly and willfully makes any false, fictitious orfraudulent representation may be liable to criminal prosecution under 18 U.S.C. 1001.

Signature & Title of Highest Official

Page 1 of 2

BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS

Place Hancock Housing CommissionDate August 20, 2020 – 2:00 p.m, ETProject No. H11-00359

Proposal of _________________________________________________________________(Hereinafter called "Bidder")

(a ______________________ corporation/a partnership/an individual, doing business as

__________________________________________________________________________)

To the Executive Director

Hancock Housing Commission (hereinafter called "Owner").

Gentlemen:

The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the following work, consisting of

1. Proposed Elevator Addition at Lakeview Manor

having examined the plans and specifications with related documents and the site of theproposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of theproposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish alllabor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the ContractDocuments, within the time set forth therein, and at the prices stated below. These prices are tocover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the Contract Documents, ofwhich this proposal is a part.

Bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract on or before a date to be specifiedin written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 210calendar days thereafter, as stipulated in the specifications. Bidder further agrees to pay asliquidated damages, the sum of $ 200.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter ashereinafter provided in the General Conditions.

Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addendum: ______________________________

Page 2 of 2

BASE PROPOSAL: Bidder agrees to perform all of the work in connection with the CFPProjects as described in the specifications and shown on the plans for the sum of

Total: $

(Amount shall be shown in both words and figures). In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern.

Accompanying this proposal is a in the amount of

____________________________________________________________________(5% certified check, 5% bid bond, etc.)

($ ).

If awarded this Contract, the Payment and Performance Bonds required by the ContractDocuments will be provided by _________________________________________________.

(Name of Surety)

Elevator Manufacture:__________________

CONTRACTOR:

SIGNATURE:

ADDRESS:

TITLE:

EMPLOYEE TAX NO.:

1

INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS REGARDING AFFIRMATIVE ACTIONUNDER EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246 AND 11914

The Contractor agrees that during the performance of this Contract:

1. He/she shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race,color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. He/she shall take affirmative action to ensure thatapplicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment with regard to theirrace, color, religion, sex, national origin or handicap. Such action shall include, but not limited to thefollowing: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising;layoff or termination: rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection of trainingincluding apprenticeship. He/she shall post in conspicuous places, available to employees andapplicants for employment, notices setting forth and provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

2. He/she shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by himself/herself or onhis/her behalf, state that all qualified applicants shall receive consideration for employment withoutregard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin or handicap.

3. He/she shall send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he/she hasbargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the saidlabor union or worker's representative of the Contractor's commitments hereunder, and shall postcopies of the notice in conspicuous place available to employees and applicant for employment.

4. He/she shall comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 andExecutive Order 11914 of April 28, 1976 and all applicable rules, regulations and orders includingthose of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto.

5. He/she shall furnish all information and reports required by the above mentioned Executive Orders11246 and 11914 and all applicable rules, regulations and orders including those by the Secretary ofLabor, and will permit access to his/her books, records and accounts by the Secretary of Housing andUrban Development, the Secretary of Labor, and other Government Agencies for the purpose ofinvestigation to ascertain compliances with such rules, regulations and orders.

6. In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contractor with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this Contract may be canceled, terminated orsuspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further governmentcontracts or federally assisted construction contracts in accordance with the procedures authorizedby Executive Orders 11246 and 11914, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remediesinvoked as provided in Executive Orders 11246 and 11914 or by the applicable rules, regulations ororders including those by the Secretary of Labor, or otherwise provided by law.

2

7. He/she shall document the affirmative actions taken to ensure equal opportunity in employment ifthe total amount of this Contract exceeds $10,000.

8. He/she shall include these instructions verbatim in every subcontract or purchase order unlessexcepted by rules, regulations or orders by the Government including those of the Secretary of Laborissued pursuant to Section 204 of said Executive Order 11246, so that such provisions will be bindingupon each subcontractor or vendor. He/she shall take such action with respect to any subcontract orpurchase order as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development may direct as a means ofenforcing such provisions, including sanctions for non-compliance; PROVIDED, however that in theevent he/she becomes involved in, or threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as aresult of such direction by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, he/she may requestthe United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United States.

"General Decision Number: MI20200124 08/07/2020 Superseded General Decision Number: MI20190124 State: Michigan Construction Type: Building County: Houghton County in Michigan. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.80 for calendar year 2020 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.80 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2020. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate,if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2020 1 05/29/2020 2 08/07/2020 * ASBE0127-004 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST INSULATOR........................$ 32.74 24.56 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BOIL0169-002 03/01/2018 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 38.65 26.22 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRMI0006-001 05/01/2019 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 27.30 20.89 TILE SETTER......................$ 27.30 20.89 ----------------------------------------------------------------

CARP1510-005 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes MILLWRIGHT.......................$ 29.10 21.38 ---------------------------------------------------------------- CARP1510-006 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Including Acoustical Ceiling Installation, Drywall Finishing/Taping, Drywall Hanging, Form Work, and Soft Floor Layer - Carpet)............$ 24.50 20.65 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0219-015 06/01/2016 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN (Excludes Low Voltage Wiring) Electrical contracts of $180,000 or less............$ 30.18 18.42 Electrical contracts over $180,000....................$ 32.38 18.63 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0324-033 05/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Crane operator, main boom & jib 120' or longer........$ 34.41 24.60 Crane operator, main boom & jib 140' or longer........$ 35.23 24.60 Crane operator, main boom & jib 220' or longer........$ 35.52 24.60 GROUP 1.....................$ 31.11 24.60 GROUP 2.....................$ 27.86 24.60 GROUP 3.....................$ 26.46 12.10 Premium rate: main boom and jib 300 feet or longer is $1.50 per hour above the 220 ft. boom and jib rate. Main boom and jib 400 feet or longer is $3.00 per hour above the 220 ft. boom and jib rate. POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: backhoe, bulldozer, crane, front end loader, excavator, paver, roller, and scraper (self-propelled and tractor drawn) GROUP 2: fork truck GROUP 3: oiler ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0008-008 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, REINFORCING AND STRUCTURAL Contracts $10,000,000 or greater.....................$ 28.44 26.62

Contracts less than $10,000,000.................$ 28.44 26.62 Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day & Christmas Day. ---------------------------------------------------------------- LABO1329-005 05/01/2019 Rates Fringes LABORER Common or General; Mason Tender - Brick; Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete; and Sandblaster.............$ 22.96 12.93 Pipelayer...................$ 23.39 12.93 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN1011-001 06/02/2019 Rates Fringes PAINTER (Insulator Foam Only)....$ 27.54 13.33 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN1011-004 06/02/2019 Rates Fringes PAINTER (Brush and Spray Only)...$ 21.52 13.33 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLAS0016-037 04/01/2014 Rates Fringes CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 20.17 10.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0111-002 05/27/2019 Rates Fringes PIPEFITTER (Excludes HVAC Pipe & System Installation)......$ 34.48 25.18 PIPEFITTER (HVAC Pipe Installation Only)...............$ 34.48 25.18 PLUMBER (Excluding HVAC Pipe & System Installation)...........$ 34.48 25.18 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ROOF0149-014 05/01/2014 Rates Fringes ROOFER...........................$ 16.65 10.98 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0007-006 07/01/2017 Rates Fringes SHEET METAL WORKER (Excluding HVAC Duct & System Installation)....................$ 27.24 27.35 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct & System Installation)...........$ 27.24 27.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUMI2011-049 02/14/2011

Rates Fringes GLAZIER..........................$ 17.50 2.27 LABORER: Landscape & Irrigation.......................$ 14.95 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 24.04 6.03 OPERATOR: Tractor...............$ 19.60 7.31 PAINTER: Roller.................$ 16.58 2.84 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 17.44 4.51 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this

classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests

for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION"

General Contract Conditions for Small Construction/Development Contracts

U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development Office of Public and Indian Housing OMB Approval No. 2577-0157 (exp. 3/31/2020)

Applicability. The following contract clauses are applicable and must be inserted into small construction/development contracts,

greater than $2,000 but not more than $150,000.

(b) The Contractor’s right to proceed shall not be terminated or the Contractor charged with damages under this clause if – (1) The delay in completing the work arises from

unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the 1. Definitions

Terms used in this form are the same as defined in form HUD-5370

2. Prohibition Against Liens

fault or negligence of the Contractor; and

The Contractor is prohibited from placing a lien on the PHA’s

(2) The Contractor, within 10 days from the beginning of such delay notifies the Contracting Officer in writing of the causes of delay. The Contracting Officer shall ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay. If, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, the findings of Fact warrant such action, time for completing the work shall be extended by written modification to the contract. The findings of the Contracting Officer shall be reduced to a written decision which shall be subject to the provisions of the Disputes

property. This prohibition shall apply to all subcontractors at any tier and all materials suppliers. The only liens on the PHA’s property shall be the Declaration of Trust or other liens approved by HUD. clause of this contract.

(c) If, after termination of the Contractor’s right to proceed, it is 3. Disputes determined that the Contractor was not in default, or that the

delay was excusable, the rights and obligation of the parties will be the same as if the termination had been for convenience of the PHA.

(a) Except for disputes arising under the Labor Standardsclauses, all disputes arising under or relating to this contract, including any claims for damages for the alleged breach thereof which are not disposed of by agreement, shall be resolved 5. Termination for Convenienceunder this clause.

(b) All claims by the Contractor shall be made in writing and (a) The Contracting Officer may terminate this contract in whole, submitted to the Contracting Officer for a written decision. A claim by the PHA against the Contractor shall be subject to a

or in part, whenever the Contracting Officer determines that such termination is in the best interest of the PHA. Any such termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor of a Notice of Termination specifying the extent to which the performance of the work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective.

written decision by the Contracting Officer. (c) The Contracting Officer shall, within 30 days after receipt of

the request, decide the claim or notify the Contractor of the date by which the decision will be made.

(d) The Contracting Officer’s decision shall be final unless the (b) If the performance of the work is terminated, either in whole or Contractor (1) appeals in writing to a higher level in the PHA in accordance with the PHA’s policy and procedures, (2) refers the appeal to an independent mediator or arbitrator, or (3) files suit in a court of competent jurisdiction. Such appeal must be made within 30 days after receipt of the Contracting Officer’s

in part, the PHA shall be liable to the Contractor for reasonable and proper costs resulting from such termination upon the receipt by the PHA of a properly presented claim setting out in detail: (1) the total cost of the work performed to date of termination less the total amount of contract payments made to the Contractor; (2) the cost (including reasonable profit) of settling and paying claims under subcontracts and material orders for work performed and materials and supplies delivered to the site, payment for which has not been made by the PHA to the Contractor or by the Contractor to the subcontractor or supplier; (3) the cost of preserving and protecting the work already performed until the PHA or assignee takes possession thereof or assumes responsibility therefore; (4) the actual or estimated cost of legal and accounting services reasonably necessary to prepare and present the termination claim to the PHA; and (5) an amount constituting a reasonable profit on the

decision. (e) The Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of

this contract, pending final resolution of any request for relief, claim, appeal, or action arising under or relating to the contract, and comply with any decision of the Contracting Officer.

4. Default

(a) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work, or any separable part thereof, with the diligence that will insure its completion within the time specified in this contract, or any extension thereof, or fails to complete said work within this time, the Contracting Officer may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate the right to proceed with the work (or separable part of the work) that has been delayed. In the event, the PHA may take over the work and complete it by contract or otherwise, and may take possession of and use any materials, equipment, and plant on the work site necessary for completing the work. The Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for any damage to the PHA resulting from the Contractor’s refusal or failure to complete the work within the specified time, whether or not the Contractor’s right to proceed with the work is terminated. This liability includes any increased costs incurred by the PHA in completing the work.

value of the work performed by the Contractor. (c) The Contracting Officer will act on the Contractor’s claim

within days (60 days unless otherwise indicated) of receipt of the Contractor’s claim.

(d) Any disputes with regard to this clause are expressly made subject to the provisions of the Disputes clause of this contract.

6. Insurance

(a) Before commencing work, the Contractor and each subcon-tractor shall furnish the PHA with certificates of insurance showing the following insurance is in force and will insure all operations under the Contract:

Page 1 of 7 Form HUD-5370-EZ (1/2014)

(1) Workers’ Compensation, in accordance with state or Ter- do not change the rights or responsibilities of the parties (e.g., change in the PHA address). All other contract modifications shall be in the form of supplemental agreements signed by the

ritorial Workers’ Compensation laws. (2) Commercial General Liability with a combined single limit

for bodily injury and property damage of not less than $ Contractor and the Contracting Officer. [Contracting Officer insert amount] per occurrence to protect the Contractor and each subcontractor against claims for bodily injury or death and damage to the property of others. This shall cover the use of all equipment, hoists, and vehicles on the site(s) not covered

(c) When a proposed modification requires the approval of HUD prior to its issuance (e.g., a change order that exceeds the PHA’s approved threshold), such modification shall not be effective until the required approval is received by the PHA.

by Automobile Liability under (3) below. If the Contractor has a “claims-made” policy, then the following additional requirements 8. Changesapply: the policy must provide a “retroactive date” which must be on or before the execution date of the Contract; and the extended reporting period may not be less than five years following the

(a) The Contracting Officer may, at any time, without notice to the

completion date of the Contract. sureties, by written order designated or indicated to be a change order, make changes in the work within the general scope of the

(3) Automobile Liability on owned and non -owned motor vehicles used on the site(s) or in connection therewith for a

contract including changes:

combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not [Contracting Officer insert amount] per

(1) In the specifications (including drawings and designs); (2) In the method or manner of performance of the work;

less than $ (3) PHA-furnished facilities, equipment, materials, services, or occurrence.

(b) Before commencing work, the Contractor shall furnish the PHA with a certificate of insurance evidencing that Builder’s Risk (fire and extended coverage) Insurance on all work in place and/or materials stored at the building site(s), including foundations and building equipment, is in force. The Builder’s Risk Insurance shall be for the benefit of the Contractor and the PHA as their interests may appear and each shall be named in the policy or policies as an insured. The Contractor in installing equipment supplied by the PHA shall carry insurance on such equipment from the time the Contractor takes possession thereof until the Contract work is accepted by the PHA. The Builder’s Risk Insurance need not be carried on excavations, piers, footings, or foundations until such time as work on the super-structure is started. It need not be carried on landscape work. Policies shall furnish coverage at all times for the full cash value of all completed construction, as well as materials in place and/or stored at the site(s), whether or not partial payment has been made by the PHA. The Contractor may terminate this insurance on buildings as of the date taken over for occupancy by the PHA. The Contractor is not required to carry Builder’s Risk Insurance for modernization work which does not involve structural alterations or additions and where the PHA’s existing fire and extended coverage policy can be endorsed to include

site; or, (4) Directing the acceleration in the performance of the work.

(b) Any other written order or oral order (which, as used in thisparagraph (b), includes direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination) from the Contracting Officer that causes a change shall be treated as a change order under this clause; provided, that the Contractor gives the Contracting Officer written notice stating (1) the date, circumstances and source of the order and (2) that the Contractor regards the order as a change order.

(c) Except as provided in this clause, no order, statement or conduct of the Contracting Officer shall be treated as a change under this clause or entitle the Contractor to an equitable adjustment.

(d) If any change under this clause causes an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or the time required for the perfor-mance of any part of the work under this contract, whether or not changed by any such order, the Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment and modify the contract in writing. However, except for a adjustment based on defective specifications, no proposal for any change under paragraph (b) above shall be allowed for any costs incurred more than 20 days (5 days for oral orders) before the Contractor gives written notice as required. In the case of defective specifications for which the PHA is responsible, the equitable adjustment shall include any increased cost reasonably incurred by the Contractor in attempting to comply with the defective such work.

(c) All insurance shall be carried with companies which are specifications. financially responsible and admitted to do business in the State in which the project is located. If any such insurance is due to expire during the construction period, the Contractor (including subcontractors, as applicable) shall not permit the coverage to lapse and shall furnish evidence of coverage to the Contracting Officer. All certificates of insurance, as evidence of coverage, shall provide that no coverage may be canceled or non-renewed by the insurance company until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Contracting Officer.

(e) The Contractor must assert its right to an adjustment under thisclause within 30 days after (1) receipt of a written change order under paragraph (a) of this clause, or (2) the furnishing of a written notice under paragraph (b) of this clause, by submitting a written statement describing the general nature and the amount of the proposal. If the facts justify it, the Contracting Officer may extend the period for submission. The proposal may be included in the notice required under paragraph (b) above. No proposal by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under this

7. Contract Modifications contract.

(a) Only the Contracting Officer has authority to modify any term(f) The Contractor’s written proposal for equitable adjustment shall

be submitted in the form of a lump sum proposal supported with an itemized breakdown of all increases and decreases in or condition of this contract. Any contract modification shall be

authorized in writing. the contract in at least the following details: (b) The Contracting Officer may modify the contract unilaterally

(1) pursuant to a specific authorization stated in a contract clause (e.g., Changes); or (2) for administrative matters which

(1) Direct Costs. Materials (list individual items, the quantity and unit cost of each, and the aggregate cost); Transporta-tion and delivery costs associated with materials; Labor


breakdowns by hours or unit costs (identified with specific work to be performed); Construction equipment exclusively necessary for the change; Costs of preparation and/ or revision to shop drawings resulting from the change; Worker’s Compensation and Public Liability Insurance; Employment taxes under FICA and FUTA; and, Bond

The Contractor shall comply with all mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Pub.L. 94-163) for the State in which the work under this contract is performed.

Costs - when size of change warrants revision. 12. Procurement of Recovered Materials (2) Indirect Costs. Indirect costs may include overhead, general

and administrative expenses, and fringe benefits not normally (a) In accordance with Section 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal treated as direct costs. Act, as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery

Act, the Contractor shall procure items designated in guidelines of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) at 40 CFR Part 247 that contain the highest percentage of recovered materials practicable, consistent with maintaining a satisfactory level of competition. The Contractor shall procure items designated in the EPA guidelines that contain the highest percentage of

(3) Profit. The amount of profit shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent, and complexity of the work required by the change.

The allowability of the direct and indirect costs shall be determined in accordance with the Contract Cost Principles and Procedures for Commercial Firms in Part 31 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (48 CFR 1-31), as implemented by HUD Handbook 2210.18, in effect on the date of this contract. The Contractor shall not be allowed a profit on the profit received by any subcontractor. Equitable adjustments for deleted work shall include a credit for profit and may include a credit for indirect costs. On proposals covering both increases and decreases in the amount of the contract, the application of indirect costs and profit shall be on the net-change in direct costs for the Contractor or subcontractor

recovered materials practicable unless the Contractor determines that such items: (1) are not reasonably available in a reasonable period of time; (2) fail to meet reasonable performance standards, which shall be determined on the basis of the guidelines of the National Institute of Standards and Technology, if applicable to the item; or (3) are only available at an unreasonable price.

(b) Paragraph (a) of this clause shall apply to items purchased performing the work. under this contract where: (1) the Contractor purchases in

excess of $10,000 of the item under this contract; or (2) during the preceding Federal fiscal year, the Contractor: (i) purchased any amount of the items for use under a contract that was funded with Federal appropriations and was with a Federal agency or a State agency or agency of a political subdivision of a State; and (ii) purchased a total of in excess of $10,000 of the item both under and outside that contract.

(g) The Contractor shall include in the proposal its request for timeextension (if any), and shall include sufficient information and dates to demonstrate whether and to what extent the change will delay the completion of the contract in its entirety.

(h) The Contracting Officer shall act on proposals within 30 days after their receipt, or notify the Contractor of the date when such action will be taken.

(i) Failure to reach an agreement on any proposal shall be a dispute under the clause entitled Disputes herein. Nothing in this clause, however, shall excuse the Contractor from proceeding with the

13. Training and Employment Opportunities for Residents in the Project Area (Section 3, HUD Act of 1968; 24 CFR 135)

contract as changed. (j) Except in an emergency endangering life or property, no change

shall be made by the Contractor without a prior order from the Contracting Officer.

(a) The work to be performed under this contract is subject to the

9. Examination and Retention of Contractor’s Records

requirements of section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u (section 3). The purpose of section 3 is to ensure that employment and other economic opportunities generated by HUD assistance or HUD-assisted projects covered by section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be directed to low- and very low-income persons, particularly persons who are

The HA, HUD, or Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives shall, until three years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine any of the Contractor’s directly pertinent books, documents, papers, or other records involving transactions related to this contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, and transcriptions.

recipients of HUD assistance for housing. (b) The parties to this contract agree to comply with HUD's

regulations in 24 CFR Part 135, which implement section 3. As evidenced by their execution of this contract, the parties to this contract certify that they are under no contractual or other impediment that would prevent them from complying with the

10. Rights in Data and Patent Rights (Ownership and Proprietary Interest)

Part 135 regulations. (c) The contractor agrees to send to each labor organization or

representative of workers with which the contractor has a The HA shall have exclusive ownership of, all proprietary interest in, and the right to full and exclusive possession of all information, materials, and documents discovered or produced by Contractor pursuant to the terms of this Contract, including but not limited to reports, memoranda or letters concerning the research and reporting tasks of this Contract.

collective bargaining agreement or other understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor organization or workers'

11. Energy Efficiency

representative of the contractor's commitments under this section 3 clause, and will post copies of the notice in conspicuous places at the work site where both employees and applicants for training and employment positions can see the notice. The notice shall describe the section 3 preference, shall set forth minimum number and job titles subject to hire, availability of apprenticeship and training positions, the


qualifications for each; and the name and location of the person(s) taking applications for each of the positions; and the

a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers.

anticipated date the work shall begin. (2) (i) Any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, (d) The contractor agrees to include this section 3 clause in every which is not listed in the wage determination and

which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefor only when all the following criteria have been

subcontract subject to compliance with regulations in 24 CFR Part 135, and agrees to take appropriate action, as provided in an applicable provision of the subcontract or in this section 3 clause, upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR Part 135. The contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where the contractor has notice or knowledge that the subcontractor has been found in

met: (a) The work to be performed by the classification

violation of the regulations in 24 CFR Part 135. requested is not performed by a classification in the (e) The contractor will certify that any vacant employment wage determination; and

positions, including training positions, that are filled (1) after the contractor is selected but before the contract is executed, and (2) with persons other than those to whom the regulations of 24 CFR Part 135 require employment opportunities to be directed, were not filled to circumvent the contractor's

(b) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and

(c) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage

obligations under 24 CFR Part 135. determination. (f) Noncompliance with HUD's regulations in 24 CFR Part 135 (ii) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be

employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action shall be sent by HUD or its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employee Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional time

may result in sanctions, termination of this contract for default, and debarment or suspension from future HUD assisted contracts.

14. Labor Standards - Davis-Bacon and Related Acts(a) Minimum Wages.

(1) All laborers and mechanics employed under this contract in the construction or development of the project(s) involved will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the regular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein; provided, that the employer’s payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the Contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in

is necessary. (iii) In the event the Contractor, the laborers or mechanics

to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.

(iv) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (a)(2)(ii) or (iii) of this clause shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification.

(3) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (4) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trusteeor other third person, the Contractor may consider as part


of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program; provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program.

the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.

(2) (i) The Contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which

(b) Withholding of Funds. HUD or its designee shall, upon

any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the Contracting Officer for transmission to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under subparagraph (c)(1) of this clause. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1) is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. The prime Contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management

its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime Contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the Contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working in the construction or development of the project, all or part of the wages required by the contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for and on account of the Contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due.

and Budget under OMB Control Number 1214-0149.) (ii) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a

“Statement of Compliance,” signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (A) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the

information required to be maintained under paragraph (c)(1) of this clause and that such information is correct and complete;

(B) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part 3; and

(C) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less(c) Payrolls and Basic Records. than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or

cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage

(1) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be

maintained by the Contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working in the construction or development of the project. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found, under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv), that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of

determination incorporated into the contract. (iii) The weekly submission of a properly executed

certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirements for submission of the “Statement of Compliance” required by subparagraph

(c)(2)(ii) of this clause. (iv) The falsification of any of the above certifications may

subject the Contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 3729 of Title 31 of the United States Code.

(3) The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under subparagraph (c)(1) available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of HUD or its designee, the Contracting Officer, or the Department of Labor and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the Contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.


(d) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed in the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate in the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved.

the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services (OATELS), or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by OATELS, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by OATELS or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice.

The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated in this paragraph, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman’s hourly rate) specified in the Contractor’s or subcontractor’s registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice’s level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event OATELS, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by OATELS, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved.

(f) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees, and journeymen under this clause shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30.

(g) Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are hereby incorporated by reference in this contract.

(h) Contract Termination; Debarment. A breach of the labor standards clauses in this contract may be grounds for termination of the contract and for debarment as a Contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.

(i) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and related ActRequirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract.

(e) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not

(j) Disputes Concerning Labor Standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this clause shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the Contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the PHA, HUD, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the

work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S.

(k) Certification of Eligibility.(1) By entering into this contract, the Contractor certifies that

Department of Labor, Employment and Training neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the Contractor’s firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon

Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee’s level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate

Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (2) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person

or firm ineligible for award of a United States Government


contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).

(3) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.

(l) Subcontracts. The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts all the provisions contained in this clause, and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these provisions in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all these provisions.

(m) Non-Federal Prevailing Wage Rates. Any prevailing wage rate (including basic hourly rate and any fringe benefits), determined under State law to be prevailing, with respect to any employee in any trade or position employed under the contract, is inapplicable to the contract and shall not be enforced against the Contractor or any subcontractor, with respect to employees engaged under the contract whenever such non-Federal prevailing wage rate exceeds: (i) the applicable wage rate determined by the Secretary of

Labor pursuant to the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 3141 et seq.) to be prevailing in the locality with respect to such trade;

(ii) an applicable apprentice wage rate based thereon specified in an apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor (DOL) or a DOL-recognized State Apprenticeship Agency; or

(iii) an applicable trainee wage rate based thereon specified in a DOL-certified trainee program.


01010-1

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF THE WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This section includes the following:

1. Contractor Acknowledgement.

2. Permits.

3. Special Site Conditions.

4. General Protection.

5. Contractor's Personnel.

6. Overtime.

7. Owner Furnished Items.

8. Contractor's Use of Premises.

9. Coordination.

10. Abbreviations and Symbols.

1.2 CONTRACTOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

A. By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site,familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, andcorrelated his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, constructionequipment and machinery, tools and appliances, and all other facilities and incidentalsnecessary for the execution, testing, initial operation and completion of the work.

1.3 PERMITS

A. All construction permits and license necessary for the work shall be the responsibility of theContractor. Permanent operational permits shall be secured by the Owner.

1.4 SPECIAL SITE CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall confine his equipment, apparatus, storage of materials, andoperations of his workmen to the areas within the limits of the project, as directed by theOwner.

01010-2

B. The Contractor shall take particular care to effect a minimum of disturbance and hazard tothe remaining existing building, the grounds and occupants.

1. The contractor and subcontractors shall take particular care when entering andusing general area space due to the elderly occupants. All moving of materialsand opening of doors shall be done with consideration of occupants present.

2. Any interruption to services, (electricity, water, sewer, etc.) shall be made only afterconsultation and scheduling with the Owner and Architect.

3. Information pertaining to existing construction and other preliminary investigations,such as location of utilities, appear on the drawings. While such data has beencollected with reasonable care, it is based on available records, there is no expressedor implied guarantee that conditions so indicated are entirely representative of thoseactually existing. They are merely given to assist the Contractor in determining theactual location and conditions.

4. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall acquaint themselves with the location of allabove ground and all underground services, utilities, structures, etc., which may beencountered or be affected by his work, and shall be responsible for any damagecaused by neglect to provide proper precautions or protection. The Owner shall notbe held responsible, or liable for damages, repairs, etc.

5. Cost of repairs and replacement of any structure or utility not scheduled for removalshall be paid by the Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall remove all demolition material from the site except items listed belowto be turned over to the Owner.

D. Parking of vehicles necessary for the demolition work and/or for construction work shouldbe confined to within the construction areas. The Contractor shall make his ownarrangements for parking employee's cars and for vehicles that cannot be contained withinthe construction area.

E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep all streets and drives in the area freeof mud, clay, gravel, debris, and any other materials which vehicles or equipment may trackor scatter onto the street or drives. The frequency of cleaning of these surfaces shall bebased on the amount of material deposited and shall not necessarily be done on a setschedule. The Contractor shall clean such streets and/or drives as required, or he shallclean them when instructed to do so by the Owner. Cleaning shall always be continued tothe end of the dirtied areas.

F. Whether shown on the drawings or not, the Contractor shall contact all public utilities forthe exact location of their underground structures such as ducts, mains or services forelectric power, gas and telephone. Support for all above ground poles for electric power,lighting and telephone wires and cables shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Ifsuch utilities are damaged by the Contractor, he shall make settlement with the Owner(s)of the utility(ies).

01010-3

1.5 GENERAL PROTECTION

A. Protect remaining adjacent buildings from any damage that could be caused by anyoperation under this contract at all times so as to maintain all remaining work, materials,apparatus and fixtures free from injury or damage.

B. Protect adjacent parking areas and vehicles parked therein from any and all damage thatcould be caused by any operation within the scope of this project.

C. Repair or have repaired at own expense any damage to existing street paving, curbs,gutters, walks, etc., not noted for removal and caused by any operation within the scope ofthis contract.

D. Maintain unobstructed access to the neighboring buildings, as well as adjacent parkingareas not scheduled for removal, at all times.

E. Any damage by failure to provide proper and adequate protection shall be repaired to thesatisfaction of the Owner or removed and replaced with new work at the Contractor'sexpense.

F. Additional protection of workers, public, adjoining property, utilities and structures asoutlined in applicable sections of the General Conditions shall be provided by theContractor.

G. While working in the apartment units, cover furniture and carpeting.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S PERSONNEL

A. The Contractor shall provide competent, suitable qualified personnel to lay out the workand perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect mayjudge the competency and qualifications of personnel and, upon his written request to theContractor, cause the immediate dismissal from the work of any incompetent andunqualified personnel.

1.7 OVERTIME

A. As of January 1, 1986, it is no longer a Federal requirement for Contractors to pay time andone-half (x 1.5) to employees working more than eight (8) hours per day. Overtimecompensation is required for hours worked in excess of forty (40) hours per week.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible to pay the Owner all overtime inspection and testingcosts which result from inspection or testing personnel working in excess of forty hours perweek or for Saturday, Sunday and holiday when such overtime work is done at the optionof the Contractor. The rate for such overtime work shall be Thirty-Five dollars ($35.00) perhour per person for all overtime hours.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

A. The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, the storage of materials and the operations ofhis workmen to that area as directed by the Owner.

01010-4

B. All work shall be performed in such a manner which will not interfere with operations of theadjacent property or facility.

C. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall be responsible for his own material upon thegrounds and shall also guard the public against all damages by reason of pits orexcavations, or because of any piles or materials about the premises, and shall be liablefor any damages occurring because of any neglect to provide such safeguard. NoContractor shall occupy any unnecessary amount of space with his material and each shallobey the instructions of the superintendent, who will see that a fair apportionment of thebuilding ground is made among the several contractors.

D. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall protect and be responsible for any damageto his work or material and shall make good without costs to the Owner any damage or lossthat may occur, unless particularly otherwise stipulated in the Contract Documents.

E. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the structure or premises to be loadedwith a weight that will endanger its safety or damage its appearance.

F. The Contractor shall enforce the Owner's or Architect's instructions regarding signs,advertisements, fires and smoking.

G. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper care andprotection of all of his materials, equipment, etc., as may be stored on the premises,subject to the approval of the Owner and Architect.

H. When any space in the building is used as a shop or storeroom, the one making use ofsuch room will be held responsible for any repairs, patching or cleaning arising from suchuse.

I. The Contractor and subcontractors must treat the residents with courtesy at all times.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor, all other prime contractors, and all subcontractors shall coordinate theirwork and shall cooperate with all other trades so as to facilitate the general progress of thework. Each trade shall afford all other trades every reasonable opportunity for the installa-tion of their work and for the storage of their material.

B. Each "trade" shall perform its work in proper sequence in relation to that of othercontractors or trades as directed by the Contractor.

C. Each "trade" shall be responsible for its demolition or removal work in a timely manner soas to not allow the tenants and their belongings to be subject to the weather, theft ordamage.

D. Each "trade" shall examine the areas for replacement and determine any specialconditions, which will be incidental to the contract, and provide all necessary materials andlabor to complete the project in a neat workmanlike manner acceptable to theARCHITECT/OWNER.

E. All items removed shall become the property of the General CONTRACTOR. GeneralContractor to take care in removal of these items.

01010-5

F. The General CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for disposal of removed items, exceptthose mentioned above. The location of refuse storage units shall be as directed by theOWNER. Site shall be cleaned daily.

G. Each Contractor shall arrange his work and dispose of his materials so as not to interferewith the work or storage of materials of other contractors. Contractor shall not use theOwner's refuse container nor place the refuse container in the parking lots. EachContractor shall join his work to that of others in accordance with the intent of the drawingsand specifications.

H. No Contractor shall endanger any work of another by cutting, digging or otherwise, andshall not cut or alter such work of any other contractor without the consent of the Architectand the other contractors.

I. It shall be the responsibility of all Contractors and Subcontractors to keep constant checkon the progress of the work so that the particular trade can insure preparation forinstallation of that trade's work and not cause delay in the progress of the work.

J. The Contractor shall give due notice and proper information to other contractors of anyspecial provisions necessary for the placing or setting of his work coming in contact withwork of other contractors. Failing to do so in proper time, he shall be held responsible andshall pay for any and all alterations and repairs necessitated by such neglect.

K. Any cost caused by defective of ill-timed work shall be born by the party responsibletherefore.

1.10 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

A. In general, abbreviations and symbols will be listed and defined on the plans. Symbols willnot be used in the specification text. Following this section is a list of abbreviations.

1.11 SPECIAL ABBREVIATIONS

A. Abbreviations are as follows:

A.A.S.H.O.: American Association of State Highway Officials

A.C.I.: American Concrete Institute

A.N.S.I.: American National Standard Institute

A.S.A.: American Standard Association

A.S.T.M.: American Society for Testing and Materials

A.W.S.: American Welding Society

A.W.W.A.: American Water Works Association

C.R.S.I.: Concrete Reinforcing Steel InstituteC.S.I.: Construction Specifications Institute

M.D.N.R.: Michigan Department of Natural Resources

01010-6

M.D.P.H.: Michigan Department of Public Health

M.D.S.H.: Michigan Department of State Highways

N.E.C.: National Electrical Code

O.S.H.A.: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Mi OSHA)

END OF SECTION

01050-1

SECTION 01050

FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Provide such field engineering services as are required for proper completionof the Work including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Establishing and maintaining lines and levels;

2. Structural design of shores, forms and similar items provided by the Contractor as partof his means and methods of construction.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,General Conditions, Supplemental Requirements, and Sections in Division 1 of theseSpecifications.

2. Additional requirements for field engineering also may be described in other Sections ofthese Specifications.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in thenecessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and themethods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Upon request of the Architect, submit:

1. Data demonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be engaged for fieldengineering services.

2. Documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering work.

3. Certification, signed by the Contractor's retained field engineer, certifying that elevationsand locations of improvements are in conformance with requirements of the ContractDocuments.

01050-2

1.04 PROCEDURES

A. In addition to procedures directed by the Contractor for proper performance of theContractor's responsibilities:

1. Locate and protect control points before starting work on the site.

2. Preserve permanent reference points during progress of the Work.

3. Do not change or relocate points or items of the Work without specific approval from theArchitect.

a. Upon direction of the Architect, require the field engineer to replace referencestakes or markers.

b. Locate such replacements according to the original survey control.

END OF SECTION

01310-1

SECTION 01310

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a construction progress schedule forthe work.

B. Contractor shall also submit a list of subcontractors and material suppliers.

1.02 SUBMISSION

A. Submit estimated schedule and subcontractor/supplier list within one week (7 days) followingaward of Contract.

1. Engineer and Owner will review schedule. Contractor to revise and resubmit asrequested.

2. Contractor shall report to the Engineer, in writing, any problems with meeting theschedule as submitted.

END OF SECTION

01340-1

SECTION 01340

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, including color chips and any other datarequired by the Contract Documents. Contractsor shall also submit a list of subcontractorsand material suppliers in accordance with the General Condition of the Contract forconstruction.

B. Related requirements are included in the General Conditions, Section in Division 1 and otherpertinent Section of these Specifications.

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner.

B. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shownon Contract Documents.

C. All submittal drawings shall provide a clear 5" x 3" space for Architect's review stamp.

D. Submit as many copies as the Contractor will need plus two (2) extra copies which shall beretained for the Architect's records. Submittal with insufficient number of copies will berejected.

1.03 PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation:

1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.

2. Show: performance characteristics and capacities, dimensions and clearances required,wiring or piping diagrams and controls.

B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:

1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information that is not applicable to the work.

2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work.

01340-2

1.04SAMPLES

A. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate functional characteristics ofthe product, with integrally related parts and attachment devises, as well as the full range ofcolor, texture and pattern.

B. Submit color samples for all items where two or more standard colors are available. Submitspecial colors where specifically requested in the various sections.

1.05CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission.

B. Determine and verify:

1. Field measurements.

2. Field construction criteria.

3. Catalog numbers and similar data.

4. Conformance with specifications.

C. Coordinate each submitted with requirements of work and the Contract Documents.

D. Notify the Architect in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the submittals fromrequirements of the Contract Documents.

E. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect'sapproval.

F. Architect's approval of shop drawings, product data or samples does not alleviate theContractor of his responsibility for conformance with the drawings and specifications.

1.06MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

A. Prior to final payment, submit to Architect one copy of maintenance schedules for all equipmentinstalled in this contract.

END OF SECTION

01360-1

SECTION 01360

LAY OUT IN BUILDINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Each Contractor and subcontractor shall lay out his own work and cooperate with each otherto avoid interference and to secure fit. Where layout drawings are necessary, they shall beprepared by the Contractor at his own expense.

B. The available areas allocated for rooms or other spaces shown on the Architect's drawingsmay not be sufficient to allow installation of every manufacturer's equipment of the requiredtype which generally con-forms with the specifications. It shall constitute sufficient reason forrejection if, in the opinion of the Architect, the equipment submitted for approval does not fitthe available space allowing adequate room and clearance for piping, conduit, duct work,associated equipment, aisles, inspection and maintenance. Any modifications to the building,other structures or other equipment necessitated by the equipment furnished by theContractor shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

01370-1

SECTION 01370

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Provide a detailed breakdown of the agreed Contract Sum showingvalues allocated to each of the various parts of the work, as specified herein and inother provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily limitedto, General Conditions and Section in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Schedule of values is required under the General Conditions.

3. Schedule of values is required to be compatible with the "continuation sheet"accompanying applications for payment.


A. Use required means to assure arithmetical accuracy of the sums described.

B. When so required by the Architect, provide copies of the subcontracts or other dataacceptable to the Architect, substantiating the sums described.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to first application for payment, submit a proposed schedule of values as itemizedby Architect for approval. Revise and resubmit as requested by Architect. Noapplication for payment will be processed until the Schedule of Values is received andapproved.

END OF SECTION

01545-1

SECTION 01545

PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The OWNER will not be responsible for security on the site of the work. EachCONTRACTOR will be held responsible for loss or injury to persons or property where hiswork is involved and shall provide (if he deems it necessary) such watchmen and take suchother precautionary measures as he may deem necessary to protect his own interests.

END OF SECTION

01600-1

SECTION 01600

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Material and Equipment incorporated in the Work shall:

1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.

2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved inwriting by the Architect.

3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:

a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering andshop practices.

b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, tobe interchangeable.

c. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the samemanufacturer.

d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.

e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall beadhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing.

4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it isdesigned or is specified.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limitedto, General Conditions, Section in Divisions 1, 6 and 9 of these Specifications.

1.02 REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIAL

A. Except as specifically indicated or specified, materials and equipment removed from anexisting structure shall not be used in the completed work.

B. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in the Work.

1. Use special care in removal, handling, reinstallation and storage to assureproper function in the completed work.

1.03 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with

01600-2

manufacturers' printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions toparties involved in the installation, including two copies to Architect. Maintain one set ofcomplete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion.

B. Printed maintenance instructions shall be provided to the Owner.

C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with suchinstructions and conformity with specified requirements.

1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturers'instructions, consult with Architect for further instructions.

2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

D. Perform work in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Do not omit anypreparatory steps or installation procedures unless specifically modified or exempted byContract Documents.

1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products in undamaged conditions, in manufacturer's original unopenedcontainers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling ordamage to products or packaging.

1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store products in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals andlabels intact and legible.

1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.

2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer'sinstructions.

B. Exterior Storage:

1. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soilingor staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervioussheet coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

2. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on raised solid surfaces toprevent mixing with foreign matter.

C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodicinspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specifiedconditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

D. Protection after installation:

01600-3

1. Provide substantial coverings to protect installed products from damage fromtraffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.

1.06 REJECTION OF MATERIAL

A. Materials will be rejected if:

1. They are stored in a manner contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Their packages show evidence of water or other damage.

3. They otherwise fail to meet the specifications.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Contractor's options:

1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meetingthat standard. Submit to Architect specifications verifying compliance.

2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select anyone of the products or manufacturers named, which complies with thespecifications.

3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "orequal", Contractor must submit a request as for substitutions for any product ormanufacturer not specifically named.

4. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is nooption.

B. Substitutions:

1. For a period of 10 days after Contract Date, the Architect will consider written(only) requests from Contractor for substitution of products.

2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete data, withdrawings and samples as appropriate, including:

a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified.

b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of thesubstitution.

c. Effect on the construction schedule.

d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with product specified.

e. Availability of maintenance service and source of replacement materials.3. Architect shall be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution.

C. Contractor's Representation: A request for a substitution constitutes a representation

01600-4

that Contractor:

1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to orsuperior in all respects to that specified.

2. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the productspecified.

3. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work, andmake such other changes as may be required to make the work complete in allrespects.

4. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which maysubsequently become apparent.

5. The Owner may require the Contractor to furnish at the Contractor's expense aspecial performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.The Architect will record time required by the Architect and the Architect'sconsultants in evaluating substitutions proposed by the Contractor and in makingchanges in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby, whether or not theArchitect accepts a proposed substitute. The Contractor shall reimburse theOwner for the charges of the Architect and the Architect's consultants forevaluating each proposed substitute.

D. The Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, andnotify the Contractor, in writing, of the decision to accept or reject the requestedsubstitution.

END OF SECTION

01700-1

SECTION 01700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Provide an orderly and efficient transfer of the complete Work to the Owner.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,General Conditions and Sections of Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Activities relative to Contract closeout are described in, but not necessarily limited to, theGeneral Conditions.

3. "Substantial Completion" is defined in the General Conditions.

1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prior to requesting inspection by the Architect, use adequate means to assure that the Work iscomplete in accordance with the specified requirements and is ready for the requestedinspection.

1.03PROCEDURES

A. Substantial Completion:

1. Prepare and submit the list required by the General Conditions.

2. Within a reasonable time after receipt of the list, the Architect will inspect the Work todetermine status of completion.

3. Should the Architect determine that the Work is not substantially complete:

a. The Architect promptly will so notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the reasonstherefore.

b. Contractors shall remedy the deficiencies and notify the Architect when ready forreinspection.

c. The Architect will reinspect the Work.

4. When the Architect concurs that the Work is substantially complete:

a. The Architect will prepare a "Certificate of Substantial Completion", accompanied bythe Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified by the Architect.

b. The Architect will submit the Certificate of the Owner and to the Contractor for theirwritten acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.

01700-2

B. Final Completion

1. Contractor to verify that the Work is complete and ready for final inspection.

2. Contractor shall perform "Final Cleaning" in accordance with provisions of Section 01710,Cleaning.

3. Contractor to prepare and submit the notice required by the General Conditions.

4. The Architect will make an inspection to verify status of completion.

5. Should the Architect determine that the Work is incomplete or defective:

a. The Architect promptly will so notify the Contractor, in writing, listing the incomplete ordefective work.

b. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies promptly, and notify the Architect when readyfor reinspection.

6. When the Architect determines that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents,he will request the Contractor to make closeout submittals.

C. Closeout submittals include, but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Operation and maintenance data for items so listed in pertinent other Sections of theseSpecifications, and for other items when so directed by the Architect.

2. Warranties.

3. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdictionincluding, but not necessarily limited to:

a. Certificates of Inspection.

b. Certificates of Occupancy.

4. Evidence of payment and release of liens.

5. List of subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors, including names,addresses, and telephone numbers where they can be reached for emergency service atall times including nights, weekends, and holidays.

01700-3

1.04 INSTRUCTION

A. Instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of systems, equipments,and similar items which were provided as part of the Work. Provide written instructions to theOwner.

END OF SECTION

01710-1

SECTION 01710

CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Throughout the construction period, maintain the buildings and site in astandard of cleanliness as described in this Section.

B. Related work: Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limitedto, General Conditions and Sections of Division 1 of these Specifications.

C. EXTREMELY IMPORTANT: At all times and in all places make sure no items, materials,equipment, tools or supplies are left in such a way as to create a tripping or other hazard to theresidents.


A. Conduct daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements forcleanliness are being met.

B. In addition to the standards described in this Section, comply with pertinent requirements ofgovernmental agencies having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specifiedstandard of cleanliness.

2.02COMPATIBILITY

A. Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface beingcleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General:

1. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impedingtraffic or drainage, and providing required protection of materials.

2. Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not required forconstruction of this Work.

01710-2

3. At least once each week, and more often if necessary, completely remove all scrap, debris,and waste material from the job site.

4. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the job site, observingrequirements, laws and codes for fire protection and protection of the environment.

B. Site:

1. Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap, debris, and wastematerial. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage.

2. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials stored on thesite. Organize as required.

3. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times.

C. Structures:

1. Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structures and pick up all scrap anddebris material. Remove such items to the place designated for their storage.

2. Daily, and more often if necessary, sweep interior spaces clean.

a. "Clean" shall be interpreted as meaning free from dust and other material capable ofbeing removed by use of reasonable effort and a hand-held broom.

3. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the structures orpertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness recommended by the manufacturerof the succeeding material, using equipment and materials required to achieve thenecessary cleanliness.

4. Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily (and more oftenif necessary) at all times while work is being performed in the space in which finishmaterials are installed.

a. "Clean" shall be interpreted as meaning free from foreign material which, in theopinion of the Architect, may be injurious to the finish floor material.

3.02FINAL CLEANING

A. "Clean" shall be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally provided by skilledcleaners using quality building maintenance equipment and materials.

B. Prior to completion of the Work, remove from the job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment,scrap, debris, and waste.

C. Site:

1. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, broom clean paved areas on thesite and public paved areas adjacent to the site.

01710-3

2. Completely remove resultant debris.

D. Structures:

1. Exterior:

a. Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials,smudges, and other foreign matter.

b. Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces.

c. If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down the exterior of thestructure.

2. Interior:

a. Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste materials,smudges, and other foreign matter.

b. Remove all traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces.

c. Remove paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces.

3. Glass: Clean inside and outside.

E. Schedule final cleaning as approved by the Architect to enable the Owner to accept a cleanWork. Final cleaning shall be performed prior to the Owner's occupancy and prior to finalinspection. Any work performed after Owner's occupancy shall be cleaned in accordance withParagraph 3.02 at the end of each work day.

3.03CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY

A. Should the Owner occupy the Work or any portion thereof prior to its completion by theContractor and final acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaningshall be as determined by the Architect or Owner in accordance with the General Conditions ofthe Contract.

END OF SECTION

01720-1

SECTION 01720

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included:

1. Throughout progress of the Work, maintain at the job site field office an accurate record ofchanges in the Contract Documents.

2. Upon completion of the Work, transfer the recorded changes to a set of dated Final ProjectRecord Documents, and submit with closeout submittals.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,General Conditions and Sections of Division 1 of these Specifications.


A. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on theContractor's staff as approved by the Architect.

B. Accuracy of records:

1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate andproper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and otherDocuments where such entry is required to show the change properly.

2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the ContractDocuments may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project RecordDocuments.

C. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred.

D. Entries on job set of Contract Documents shall be made in red ink and shall be dated andinitialed by person making entry.

1.03SUBMITTALS

A. The Architect's approval of the current status of Project Record Documents may, at thediscretion of the Architect, be a prerequisite to the Architect's approval of requests for progresspayment. Submission of Final Project Record Documents shall be required for final paymentunder the Contract. See Contract Closeout Submittals, Section 01700.

B. Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, secure the Architect's approval of thecurrent status of the Project Record Documents.

C. Prior to submitting request for final payment, submit the Final Project Record Documents to the

01720-2

Architect and secure his approval.

1.04PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and fromloss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded data to the finalProject Record Documents for submittal to the Architect.

B. In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data to theArchitect's approval.

1. Such means shall include, if necessary in the opinion of the Architect, removal andreplacement of concealable materials.

2. In such case, provide replacements to the standards originally required by the ContractDocuments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Job set: Promptly following receipt of the Owner's Notice to Proceed, secure from the Architectat no charge to the Contractor one complete set of all documents comprising the Contract.

B. Final Record Documents: At a time nearing the completion of the Work, secure from theArchitect, at no charge to the Contractor, one complete set transparencies of all drawingscomprising the Contract.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET

A. Immediately upon receipt of the job set, described above, identify each of the Documents withthe title "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET".

B. Preservation:

1. Considering the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions upon whichthe job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, and the conditions underwhich these activities will be performed, devise a suitable method for protecting the job setto the approval of the Architect.

2. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by theArchitect, until start of transfer of data to Final Project Record Documents.

3. Maintain the job set at the site of Work in Contractor's field office.C. Making entries on Drawings:

1. Using a red ink pen clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required.

01720-3

2. Date all entries and initial by person making entry.

3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected.

4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes.

D. Make entries in the other pertinent documents as approved by the Architect.

E. Conversion of schematic layouts:

1. In some cases on the Drawings, such as the arrangement of conduits, circuits, piping,ducts, and similar items, is shown schematically and is not intended to portray precisephysical layout.

a. Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the Architect'sapproval.

b. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate informationas to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on thedrawings.

2. Show on the job set of Record Drawings, accurate to within six inches, the centerline ofeach run of items such as are described above.

a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "cast iron drain", "galv. water", andthe like.

b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item ("under slab", "in ceilingplenum", "exposed", and the like).

c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliable to theSpecifications.

3. The Architect may waive the requirements for conversion of schematic layouts where in theArchitect's judgment, conversion serves no useful purpose. However, do not rely uponwaiver of this requirement except as specifically issued in writing by the Architect.

01720-4

3.02FINAL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. The purpose of the Final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regardingall aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work toproceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination.

B. Approval of recorded data prior to transfer:

1. Following receipt of transparencies, and prior to start of transfer of recorded data thereto,secure the Architect's approval of all recorded data on Record Documents Job Set.

2. Make required revisions.

C. Transfer of data to Drawings:

1. Carefully transfer all change data shown on the job set to corresponding transparencies ofthe final set, coordinating the changes as required.

D. Transfer of data from Other Documents:

1. If the Documents have been kept clean during progress of the Work, and if entries thereonhave been orderly to the approval of the Architect, the job set of those Documents may beaccepted as final Record Documents.

E. Review and Submittal:

1. Submit the completed set of Final Project Record Documents to the Architect.

2. Participate in review meetings as required.

3. Make required changes and promptly deliver the Final Project Record Documents to theArchitect.

3.03CHANGES SUBSEQUENT TO ACCEPTANCE

A. The Contractor has no responsibility for recording changes in the Work subsequent to FinalCompletion, except for changes resulting from work performed under Warranty.

END OF SECTION

01740-1

SECTION 01740

GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES, AND BONDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all materials and equipment furnished and workperformed for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion, unlessotherwise noted. The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees for a period of one (1) yearfrom the date of substantial completion of the system that the completed system is free fromall defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and the CONTRACTOR shall promptlymake such corrections as may be necessary be reason of such defects including the repairsof any damage to other parts of the system resulting from such defects. The OWNER willgive notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. In the event that theCONTRACTOR should fail to make such repairs, the OWNER may do so and charge theCONTRACTOR the cost thereby incurred. The Performance Bond shall remain in full forceand effect through the guarantee period.

B. The OWNER may require additional bonds besides those required by the General Conditions.A bond to be furnished with roofing may be required, etc. Such requests will be stated in thepertinent part of the specifications.

END OF SECTION

[D120-00183]

SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Demolishing designated building equipment and fixtures.2. Demolishing designated construction.3. Cutting and alterations for completion of the Work.4. Removing, storing, and reinstalling items for protection.5. Protecting items to remain.6. Removing demolished materials.

B. Related Sections:1. 022220 – Hazardous Materials Abatement

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Demolition Schedule: Indicate overall schedule and interruptions required for utility andbuilding services.


A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electricaldisconnection and re-connection, and MiOSHA.

B. Conform to applicable requirements for procedures when hazardous or contaminated materialsare discovered.

C. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 SCHEDULING

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for scheduling.

B. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction.

C. Cooperate with Owner in scheduling noisy operations and waste removal that may impactOwners operation and occupancy in adjoining spaces.

D. Perform noisy, malodorous, dusty work on days when the Owner is not occupying the building.

E. Coordinate utility and building service interruptions with Owner.

[D120-00183]


1. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without three days priorwritten notice to Owner and only upon the Owner’s approval.

2. Schedule tie-ins to existing systems to minimize disruption.3. Coordinate Work to ensure fire alarms, smoke detectors, emergency lighting, exit signs

and other life safety systems remain in full operation in occupied areas.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.

B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.

C. Asbestos Containing Material (ACBM): Owner has documentation of locations in the buildingswith asbestos-containing materials. Contractor shall become familiar with this document1. Documents will be made available at the time of bidding.2. Verify MiOSHA training for all personnel3. Follow MiOSHA procedures for construction, demolition, and disposal in areas adjacent

to and including areas with ACBM.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.

B. Mark location and termination of utilities.

C. Erect and maintain temporary barriers and security devices, including warning signs and lights,for protection of the public, Owner, and existing improvements indicated to remain.

D. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.

E. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permitcontinued Owner occupancy.

F. Prevent movement of structure; provide temporary bracing and shoring required to ensure safetyof existing structure.

G. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.

H. Do not close or obstruct building egress path.

[D120-00183]


I. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written noticeto Owner, and only upon Owner’s approval.

3.2 REMOVAL AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS

A. Prior to flooring removal and replacement in the existing building, Contractor shall removecorridor lockers, loose furniture, and fixed equipment that would otherwise interfere with thecomplete and proper removal of the flooring.

B. Coordinate with Owner to identify temporary storage location(s) for building components andequipment required to be removed and stored for reinstallation.

C. Tag components and equipment to facilitate reinstallation before substantial completion.

D. Protect designated salvage items from demolition operations until items can be removed.

E. Carefully remove building components and equipment indicated to be salvaged.

F. Disassemble as required to permit relocation to designated storage areas.

G. Package small and loose parts to avoid loss.

H. Mark equipment and packaged parts to permit identification and consolidation of components ofeach salvaged item.

I. Prepare assembly instructions consistent with disassembled parts. Package assemblyinstructions in protective envelope and securely attach to each disassembled salvaged item.

J. Contractor shall be responsible for the protection and storage of components to be reused.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.

B. Maintain protected egress from and access to adjacent existing buildings at all times.

C. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and immediately notifyArchitect/Engineer.

D. Disconnect and remove utilities within demolition areas.

E. Cap and identify abandoned utilities at termination points when utility is not completelyremoved. Annotate Record Drawings indicating location and type of service for capped utilitiesremaining after demolition.

F. Demolish in orderly and careful manner. Protect existing improvements, supporting structuralmembers and adjacent finished areas.

G. Carefully remove building components indicated to be reused.1. Disassemble components as required to permit removal.

[D120-00183]


2. Package small and loose parts to avoid loss.3. Mark components and packaged parts to permit reinstallation.4. Store components, protected from construction operations, until reinstalled.

H. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burnor bury materials on site.

I. Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in cleancondition.

J. Remove temporary Work.

A. Remove, store and protect the following materials and equipment:

END OF SECTION 024119.13

[H11-00359]

Concrete Forming and Accessories03 10 00 - 1

SECTION 03 10 00

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Formwork for cast-in place concrete.2. Shoring, bracing, and anchorage.3. Form accessories.4. Form stripping.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.3. Section 04 20 16 – Reinforced Unit Masonry: Product requirements for masonry

accessories for placement by this Section.4. Section 04 05 03 – Masonry Mortar and Grouting5. Section 04 20 19 - Veneer Unit Masonry6. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Product requirements for metal

fabrications for placement by this Section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute:1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials.2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.4. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

B. American Forest and Paper Association:1. AF&PA - National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.

C. The Engineered Wood Association:1. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial

Plywood.

D. ASTM International:1. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and ResilientBituminous Types).

2. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

E. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau:1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.

[H11-00359]


1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing inaccordance with ACI 318 to conform to design and applicable code requirements toachieve concrete shape, line and dimension as indicated on Drawings.

B. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for the safety of structures, occupants andworkers during construction.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with AF&PA.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Design formwork under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced indesign of this Work and licensed in State of Michigan.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.

B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration frommoisture.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work, requiring attachment of componentsto formwork.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Materials: Unless specified otherwise, the contractor shall use metal, plywood,presswood form liners or plastic surfaced plywood.

B. Build all forms using the largest pieces possible. All form joints shall be laid out havingstraight lines.

C. Plywood: Plywood shall be sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges.

D. Lumber Forms:1. Application: Use for edge forms and unexposed finish concrete.

[H11-00359]


2. Boards: 6 inches or 8 inches in width, ship-lapped or tongue and groove,“Standard” Grade Douglas Fir, conforming to WCLIB Standard Grading Rulesfor West Coast Lumber. Surface boards on four sides.

E. Plywood Forms:1. Application: Use for exposed finish concrete.2. Forms: Conform to PS-1; full size 4 x 8 feet panels; each panel labeled with

grade trademark of APA/EWA.3. Plywood for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Minimum of 5/8

inch thick; APA/EWA “B-B Plyform Structural I Exterior” grade.4. Plywood where “Smooth Finish” is required, as indicated on Drawings: “HD

Overlay Plyform Structural I Exterior” grade, minimum of space 3/4 inch thick.

2.2 PREFABRICATED FORMS

A. Manufacturers:1. Aluma-Systems Inc., Burke Co.2. Economy Forms Corp.3. Molded Fiber Glass Concrete Forms Co.4. Perma Tubes.5. Sonoco Products Co.6. Symons Corp.7. Western Forms, Inc.8. Other products submitted and approved by Engineer/Architect.9. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to supportweight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance offinished surfaces.

C. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to supportweight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance offinished concrete surfaces.

D. Pan Type: Steel of size and profile required.

E. Tubular Column Type: Round, spirally wound laminated fiber material, surface treatedwith release agent, non-reusable, of sizes required; manufactured by Sonotube or equal.

F. Steel Forms: Sheet steel, suitably reinforced, and designed for particular use shown onDrawings.

G. Form Liners: Smooth, durable, grainless and non-staining hardboard, unless otherwiseshown on Drawings.

H. Framing, Studding and Bracing: Stud or No. 3 structural light framing grade.

[H11-00359]


2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Form Ties: Removable Snap-off type, galvanized metal, fixed or adjustable length, conetype, with waterproofing washer, free of defects capable of leaving holes larger than one(1) inch in concrete surface.

B. Spreaders: Standard, non-corrosive metal form clamp assembly, of type acting asspreaders and leaving no metal within one (1) inch of concrete face. Wire ties, woodspreaders or through bolts are not permitted.

C. Form Anchors and Hangers:1. Do not use anchors and hangers exposed concrete leaving exposed metal at

concrete surface.2. Symmetrically arrange hangers supporting forms from structural steel members

to minimize twisting or rotation of member.3. Penetration of structural steel members is not permitted.

D. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorbmoisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use onconcrete.1. “Arcal-80”; Arcal Chemical Corporation.2. “Synthex”; Industrial Synthetics Company.3. “Nox-Crete Form Coating”; Nox-Crete Company.4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.5. Other products submitted and approved by Engineer/Architect.

E. Corners: Chamfer, type; 3/4"x3/4" inch. Do not chamfer columns that are flush withconcrete block walls. Stop chamfers 6 in below suspended ceilings and 4 ½" abovefinished floors where columns are exposed. Terminate chamfers with 45 degree anglecut.

F. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealedslots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.

G. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, withalignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing toconcrete formwork.

H. Vapor Retarder: Where shown on Drawings, 6 mil thick polyethylene sheet.

I. Bituminous Joint Filler: ASTM D1751.

J. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Size, strength and character tomaintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

2.4 COATINGS

A. Coatings for Aluminum:1. Conlux:

[H11-00359]


a. Primer: Bond Plex 46 or 66 (water-borne urethane).b. Top Coat: Epolon Multi-Mil 39 (epoxy polyamide).

2. Sherwin Williams: Topcoat of Heavy Duty Epoxy B67-B60B3 (epoxypolyamide). Note: Self-priming.

3. Benjamin Moore:a. Primer: Epoxy Rust-Inhibitive Primer (epoxy polyamide).b. Top Coat: Epoxy Enamel (epoxy polyamide).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensionsagree with Drawings.

B. When formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete coverover reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Architect/Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Earth Forms:1. Earth forms are not permitted.

B. Formwork - General:1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to

hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that topforms can be omitted.

2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and ofsufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads fromconstruction operations.

3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless otherwiseshown on Drawings.

4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned ormisplaced forms before placing concrete.

5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete.

C. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete:1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms.2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from

surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish.3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets

without springing into place.4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible.5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete.6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges.7. Level and continue horizontal joints.8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped.

[H11-00359]


D. Forms for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Use plywood or steel forms.After erection of forms, tape form joints to prevent protrusions in concrete.

E. Framing, Studding and Bracing:1. Space studs at 16 inches on center maximum for boards and 12 inches on center

maximum for plywood.2. Size framing, bracing, centering, and supporting members with sufficient

strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from constructionoperations.

3. Construct beam soffits of material minimum of 2 inches thick.4. Distribute bracing loads over base area on which bracing is erected.5. When placed on ground, protect against undermining, settlement or accidental

impact.

F. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance withrequirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318.

G. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damageconcrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.

H. Obtain Architect/Engineer’s approval before framing openings in structural members notindicated on Drawings.

I. Install chamfer strips on external corners of beams, joists and columns.

J. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed toview. Do not patch formwork.

3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.

B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.

C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are indicated to receive specialfinishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreatedforms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

D. Reuse and Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating beforeeach reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or edges. Applyform coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Do not coatforms for concrete indicated to receive “scored finish”. Apply form coatings beforeplacing reinforcing steel.

3.4 INSTALLATION - INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS

A. Install formed openings for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work.

[H11-00359]


B. Locate and set in place items required to be cast directly into concrete.

C. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work.

D. Position recessed reglets for brick veneer masonry anchors in accordance with spacingand intervals specified in Division 04.

E. Install accessories straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed duringconcrete placement.

F. Install water stops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal jointswatertight.

G. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaningand inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.

H. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, andneatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.

I. Form Ties:1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms.2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete.3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped.4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical and aligned vertically and horizontally

unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

J. Arrangement: Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit formremoval without damage to concrete.

K. Construction Joints:1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces

to provide straight line at joints.2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms to

conceal shrinkage.3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same

appearance as butted plywood joints.4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true and sharp.

L. Embedded Items:1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots, nailers,

water stops, and other features.2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete.3. Obtain installation and setting information for embedded items furnished under

other Specification sections.4. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to

placing concrete.5. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet

requirements of ACI 318 for size and location limitations.

[H11-00359]


M. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete:1. Frame openings in concrete where indicated on Drawings. Establish exact

locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment ofwork specified under other sections.

2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement.3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as result of failure to provide

required openings.

N. Screeds:1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on

slabs.2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Drawings.3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete

and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water.

O. Screed Supports:1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarder membranes, use

cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane.2. Staking through membrane is not be permitted.

P. Cleanouts and Access Panels:1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to

permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris and waste material.2. Clean forms and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Remove chips,

saw dust and other debris. Thoroughly blow out forms with compressed air justbefore concrete is placed.

3.5 FORM CLEANING

A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.

B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure thatwater and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.

D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts.Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceedwithin heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.

3.6 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry itsown weight and imposed loads and removal has been approved by Architect/Engineer.

B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concretesurfaces scheduled for exposure to view.

[H11-00359]


C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will notbe damaged. Discard damaged forms.

D. Leave forms in place for minimum number of days as specified in ACI 347.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. Tolerances: Construct formwork to produce completed concrete surfaces withinconstruction tolerances specified in ACI 117.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance withformwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but prior toplacing concrete.

C. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Concrete Reinforcing03 20 00 - 1

SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Reinforcing bars.2. Welded wire fabric.3. Reinforcement accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute:1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.3. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.4. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement.2. ASTM A184 - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats

for Concrete Reinforcement.3. A185 -07 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,

for Concrete.4. ASTM A496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete

Reinforcement.5. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed,

for Concrete Reinforcement.6. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars

for Concrete Reinforcement.7. ASTM A704 - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats

for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. American Welding Society:1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice.2. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars.

[H11-00359]


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice, ACI 301 and ACI318.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish.

B. Plain Wire: ASTM A82 unfinished.

C. Welded Plain Wire Fabric: ASTM A185; in flat sheets or coiled rolls unfinished.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Tie Wire: 16 gage annealed type per ASTM A82.

B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support ofreinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad onbottom to prevent vapor retarder puncture.

C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed ConcreteSurfaces: Plastic-coated steel type; size and shape to meet Project conditions.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice.

B. Form reinforcement bends with minimum diameters in accordance with ACI 318.

C. Fabricate column reinforcement with offset bends at reinforcement splices.

[H11-00359]


D. Form spiral column reinforcement from minimum 3/8 inch diameter continuousdeformed bar or wire.

E. Locate reinforcement splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress.Review location of splices with Architect/Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PLACEMENT

A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate fromrequired position beyond specified tolerance.1. Do not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly except as permitted by

Architect/Engineer.

B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder.

C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.

D. Space reinforcement bars with minimum clear spacing in accordance with ACI 318 butnot less than 1 inch.1. Where bars are indicated in multiple layers, place upper bars directly above

lower bars.2. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318

E. Splice reinforcing where indicated on Drawings.

F. Bond and ground reinforcement in accordance with Electric Code requirements.


A. Install reinforcement within the following tolerances for flexural members, walls, andcompression members:

Reinforcement Depth Depth Tolerance Concrete Cover Tolerance

Greater than 8 inches plus or minus 3/8 inch minus 3/8 inch

Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch

B. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

B. Reinforcement Inspection:

[H11-00359]


1. Placement Acceptance: Specified material requirements and specified placementtolerances.

2. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.3. Periodic Placement Inspection: Inspect for correct materials, fabrication, sizes,

locations, spacing, concrete cover, and splicing.4. Coordinate inspection of reinforcement with building authority have jurisdiction

and obtain approval prior to placing concrete.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Slab-on-Grade: Deformed bars and wire fabric, unfinished.1. Welded Plain Wire Fabric: ASTM A185; in flat sheets unfinished.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Cast-In-Place Concrete03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete for the following:1. Foundations.2. Slabs on grade.3. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices.4. Equipment pads.5. Site Concrete for curbing and sidewalks

B. Related Sections:1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Formwork and

accessories.2. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.3. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing.4. Section 03 39 00 - Concrete Curing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute:1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.2. ACI 305 - Hot Weather Concreting.3. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.4. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.5. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field.2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.3. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.4. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.5. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement

Concrete.6. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.7. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.8. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed

Concrete by the Volumetric Method.9. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed

Concrete by the Pressure Method.10. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for

Concrete.11. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.12. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.

[H11-00359]


13. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or CalcinedNatural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.

14. ASTM C685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made By VolumetricBatching and Continuous Mixing.

15. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use inProducing Flowing Concrete.

16. ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly MixedHydraulic-Cement Concrete.

17. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-CementGrout (Nonshrink).

18. ASTM C1157 - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement.19. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

for Concrete (Bituminous Type).20. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and

Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on expansion joint devices, attachment accessories, admixturesand mix design.

C. Design Data:1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength. Submit separate mix

designs when admixtures are required for the following:a. Hot and cold weather concrete work.b. Air entrained concrete work.

2. Identify mix ingredients and proportions, including admixtures.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and interfacerequired with adjacent Work.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities andcomponents concealed from view in finished construction.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather.

C. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather.

D. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work.

[H11-00359]


1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 7days.

B. Maintain high early strength concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degreesF for minimum 3 days.

1.7 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate placement of joint devices and inserts, etc. with erection of concrete formworkand placement of form accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I – Normal, Type IA - Air Entraining, Type III - High EarlyStrength

B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330.

D. Water: ACI 318; potable, without deleterious amounts of chloride ions.

2.2 ADMIXTURES

A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.

B. Chemical: ASTM C494.1. Type A - Water Reducing.2. Type B - Retarding.3. Type C - Accelerating.

C. Fly Ash: Not permitted

D. Plasticizing: ASTM C1017 Type I, plasticizing.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor Retarder: 6 mil poly sheet.

B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallicaggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimumcompressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.

[H11-00359]


2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS

A. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/2 inch thick;tongue and groove profile.

B. Joint Filler Type B: ASTM D1752; recycled PVC; 1/2 inch thick.

C. Joint Filler Type C: ASTM D1752; Pre-molded sponge rubber; 1/2 inch thick.

D. Sealant: ASTM D6690, Type I.

2.5 CONCRETE MIX

A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Provide concrete for foundation/footings and interior concrete floor slabs to the followingdesign:Compressive Strength (7 day) 2,400 psiCompressive Strength (28 day) 3,500 psi (5.5 sack)Cement 517poundsCoarse Aggregate 1700-1900 poundsFine Aggregate 1300-1600 poundsWater/Cement Ratio 0.4-0.48Course Aggregate Size MDOT 6AFine Aggregate Size MDOT 2NSAir Entrained N/AFly Ash Not ApprovedSlump Less than 6"

C. Provide concrete walls, columns and structural beams and exterior concrete slabs/sidewalks,curbing to the following design:Compressive Strength (7 day) 2,800 psiCompressive Strength (28 day) 4,000 psi (6 sack)Cement 564 poundsCoarse Aggregate 1700-1900 poundsFine Aggregate 1300-1600 poundsWater/Cement Ratio 0.4-0.48Course Aggregate Size MDOT 6AFine Aggregate Size MDOT 2NSAir Entrained 4-6%Fly Ash Not ApprovedSlump Less than 4”

D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.

E. The use of calcium chloride will not be permitted.

F. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.

[H11-00359]


G. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.

C. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete areaccurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with placing concrete.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent.Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials.

B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout or epoxy anchor perArchitect/Engineer recommendation.

C. Remove debris and ice from formwork, reinforcement, and concrete substrates.

D. Remove water from areas receiving concrete before concrete is placed.

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. Notify testing laboratory minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.

C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints, arenot disturbed during concrete placement.

D. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade in accordance with ASTM E1643. Lapjoints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends.

E. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vaporretarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.

F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/4 inch thick joint filler. Separate floorslabs at door thresholds from top of concrete foundation wall with bond breaker or 30# felt.

G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations.Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/4 inch of finished slab surface.

I. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence.Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

[H11-00359]


J. Deposit concrete at final position. Prevent segregation of mix.

K. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined bypredetermined joints.

L. Consolidate concrete without segregating.

M. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, andtest samples taken.

N. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and constructionjoints.

O. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.

P. Place floor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated.

Q. Saw cut joints within 12 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth ofslab thickness.

R. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness specified in Section 0335 00. Exterior slabs on grade/sidewalks shall be maximum 2% slope, unless specifiedotherwise for ramps, etc.

3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. Wood float surfaces receiving quarry tile, ceramic tile and terrazzo with full bed settingsystem.

C. Steel trowel surfaces receiving carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin setquarry tile or thin set ceramic tile.

D. Steel trowel surfaces which are indicated to be exposed.

E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly todrains at 1/8 inch per foot nominal, or as shown.

3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot orcold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

1. Protect concrete footings from freezing for minimum 5 days.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for periodnecessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. Cure concrete in accordancewith ACI 308.1.

C. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

[H11-00359]


D. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas continuously for 7days.

E. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days.


A. OWNER’S TESTING AGENCY shall perform field inspection and testing in accordancewith ACI 318.

B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.

C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Engineer/Architect for review priorto commencement of Work.

D. Concrete Inspections:1. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures.2. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and

procedures.

E. Strength Test Samples:1. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172.2. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31, cylinder specimens,

standard cured.3. Sample concrete and make one set of three cylinders for every 50 cu yds or

less of each class of concrete placed each day and for every 2,500 sf of surfacearea for slabs on grade.

4. As a minimum, Contractors tester shall make one set of cylinders for each ofthe following:

a. Footings: One test per 50 cyds or (1) test per pour if less than 50 cyds.b. Slabs on Grade: One test per 50 cyds or (1) test per pour if less than 50

cyds.c. Elevated slabs: One test per 50 cyds or (1) test per pour if less than 50 cyds.

5. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting, and field cure.

F. Field Testing:1. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143.2. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173 and ASTM C231.3. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064.4. Measure slump and temperature for each compressive strength concrete

sample.5. Measure air content in air entrained concrete for each compressive strength

concrete sample.

G. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing:1. Test Method: ASTM C39.2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318.3. Test one cylinder at 7 days.4. Test two cylinders at 28 days.5. Dispose remaining cylinders when testing is not required.

[H11-00359]


H. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature andtest samples taken.

3.7 PATCHING

A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.

B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. NotifyArchitect/Engineer upon discovery.

C. Patch imperfections as directed by Architect/Engineer.

3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions,tolerances or specified requirements.

B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Architect/Engineer.Visible shrinkage cracks shall be replaced or repaired as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon expressdirection of Architect/Engineer for each individual area.

3.9 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES

A. Footings: 3,500 psi -28 day concrete.

B. Interior Slabs: 3,500 psi - 28 day concrete

C. Exterior Slabs/Sidewalks, Foundation Walls: 4,000 psi - 28 day concrete, air entrained.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Concrete Finishing03 35 00 - 1

SECTION 03 35 00

CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Finishing concrete floors.2. Floor surface treatment.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to

receive finish; control and formed expansion and contraction joints and jointdevices.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute:1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.2. ACI 302.1 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and of

Levelness Using the F-number System.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on sealer, compatibilities, and limitations.




A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting productson site.

B. Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum.

[H11-00359]


C. Ventilation: Sufficient to prevent injurious gases from temporary heat or other sourcesaffecting concrete.

1.7 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate the Work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:1. BASF Chemical Company2. Cresset Chemical Company.3. Dayton Superior Corp.4. Euclid Chemical Co.5. L & M Construction Chemicals.6. Nox-Crete Chemicals.7. L M Scofield Co.8. Sika Corp.9. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPOUNDS - HARDENERS AND SEALERS

A. Chemical Hardener: Magnesium fluorosilicate and zinc fluorosilicate blend liquid type.

B. Sealer: Clear, saline type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the Work of this section.

3.2 FLOOR FINISHING

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1.

B. Wood float surfaces receiving ceramic tile with full bed setting system.

C. Steel trowel surfaces receiving carpeting and thin set ceramic tile.

D. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfacesuniformly to drains at 1/8 inch per foot nominal.

[H11-00359]


3.3 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT

A. Apply sealer on exterior concrete sidewalks.

3.4 FOUNDATION WALLS

A. Paint foundation walls to match existing.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Correct defects in defined traffic floor by grinding or removal and replacement ofdefective Work. Areas requiring corrective Work will be identified. Re-measurecorrected areas by same process.

END OF SECTION

[D119-18652]

Masonry Mortaring and Grouting04 05 03 - 1

SECTION 04 05 03

MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes mortar and grout for masonry.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 04 20 16 - Reinforced Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute:1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM C5 - Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes.2. ASTM C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.3. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.4. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.5. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.6. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.7. ASTM C199 - Standard Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortars.8. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.9. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.10. ASTM C387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials

for Mortar and Concrete.11. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.12. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.13. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.14. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.15. ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.16. ASTM C1142 - Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit

Masonry.17. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry

Prisms.18. ASTM C1329 - Standard Specification for Mortar Cement.19. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements.

[D119-18652]


B. Samples: Submit two samples of veneer brick mortar, illustrating mortar color and colorrange.

C. Design Data: Submit design mix when Property specification of ASTM C270 is to beused, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.

D. Test Reports:1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property

requirements of ASTM C270.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature ortemperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F.

C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature isgreater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with windvelocity greater than 8 mph.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

A. Manufacturers:1. CTS Cement Manufacturing Co.2. Glen-Gery.3. Holcim Ltd.4. LaFarge Corp.5. Lehigh Portland Cement.6. The Quikrete Companies.7. Solomon Colors.8. Southern Grouts and Mortars.9. SpecMix.10. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type S, gray color.

B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.

[D119-18652]


C. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non-hydraulic type.

D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404, fine and coarse.

E. Water: Clean and potable.

F. Mortar Color:1. Plain Block: natural color (gray).

G. Bonding Agent: Latex type.

H. Calcium chloride is not permitted.

2.3 MIXES

A. Mortar Mixes:1. Mortar For Structural Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using Proportion

specification.2. Mortar For Non-Structural Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using Proportion

specification.3. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using Proportion specification.4. Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated

lime, and two parts graded (80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume. Addaluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium stearate equal to 2 percentof Portland cement by weight.

5. Mortar for Exterior Exposed Masonry: Water repellent admixture.

B. Mortar Mixing:1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities

needed for immediate use.2. Achieve uniformly damp sand immediately before mixing process.3. Add mortar color and admixtures to achieve uniformity of mix and coloration.4. Re-temper only within two hours of mixing.

C. Grout Mixes:1. Grout for Non-Structural Masonry: 2,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-11 inches

slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine or Coarse grout.2. Grout for Structural Masonry: 2,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-11 inches slump;

mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine or Coarse grout.3. Application:

a. Coarse Grout: For grouting spaces with minimum 4 inches dimension inevery direction.

b. Fine Grout: For grouting other spaces.

D. Grout Mixing:1. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94, modified to use ingredients complying

with ASTM C476.

[D119-18652]


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ACI 530.1 Specifications for MasonryStructures.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.All Testing shall be by independent testing agency, contracted separately by the Owner.

B. Establishing Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270.

C. Testing Frequency: One set of specified tests for every 5,000 sft of completed wall area.

D. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780 for aggregate ratio and water content,air content, consistency, and compressive strength.

E. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength, and inaccordance with ASTM C143for slump.

F. Test compressive strength of mortar and masonry to ASTM C1314; test in accordance withmasonry unit sections specified.

G. Establishing Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Masonry Wall: Concrete masonry with Type S mortar.

B. Veneer Brick: Brick masonry with Type S mortar.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Reinforced Unit Masonry04 20 16 - 1

SECTION 04 20 16

REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes concrete masonry units reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 04 05 03 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: Mortar and grout.2. Section 04 20 19 – Veneer Unit Masonry3. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Product requirements for loose steel lintels,

fabricated steel items, for placement by this section.4. 072726 – Fluid-Applied Air Barriers

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute:1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement.2. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.3. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI

Tensile Strength.4. ASTM A580 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire.5. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement.6. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.7. ASTM A951 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint

Reinforcement.8. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building

Construction.9. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited

on Iron and Steel.10. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.11. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.12. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry

Units and Related Units.13. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made

from Clay or Shale).

[H11-00359]


14. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene ThermalInsulation.

15. ASTM C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium SilicateMasonry Units.

16. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials.

17. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction andMaterials.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Concrete Masonry Compressive Strength (f'm): 2,000 psi; determined by unit strengthmethod.1. Concrete Masonry Units: 2,000 psi minimum net area compressive strength.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Submit data for masonry units, brick and fabricated wire reinforcement, wall ties,

anchors and other accessories.

C. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, specified compressive strength of masonry,masonry unit assembly strength in each plane, supportive test data.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.



1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum ten yearsexperience.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept masonry units on site. Inspect for damage.

C. Store masonry units on pallets, elevated to avoid contamination. Cover with weatherresistant materials.



[H11-00359]




1.9 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate masonry work with installation of window and door anchors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

A. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY1. Manufacturers:

a. Superior Block, Inc.b. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. COMPONENTS1. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90; normal weight

and medium weight.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Single Wythe and Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951; truss or ladder type;steel 0.148 inch diameter side rods with 0.148 inch diameter cross ties; hot dip galvanized.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish.

C. Wall Ties: ASTM A82; steel wire, adjustable; ASTM A153 hot dip galvanized.

D. Dovetail Anchors: Bent steel strap, ASTM A153 hot dip galvanized.

E. Anchor Rods: ASTM A307; Grade C; J-shaped or L-shaped; complete with washers andheavy hex nuts; sized for minimum 15 inch embedment; galvanized finish.1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A153.

F. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 03.

G. Composite Copper Flashings: polyethylene film laminated to copper sheet; Copper-Flexmanufactured by Hohmann and Barnard.

H. Preformed CMU Control Joints: Rubber material. Furnish with corner and tee accessories,cement fused joints.

[H11-00359]


I. Joint Filler: Closed cell rubber; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding;maximum lengths.

J. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

K. Precast Concrete Lintels: Size as indicated on drawings.

L. Steel Lintels: Size as indicated on drawings. Exterior steel lintels shall be hot dipgalvanized.

M. Per Section 072726 Fluid-Applied Air Barrier.

N. MDCD, Motor Dropping Collection Device: Mortar net.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

C. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.

D. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

E. Verify masonry units are free of cracks, spalling, disfigurements, face chips or edge chips inexcess of 1/4 inch in length or depth.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place untilbuilding structure provides permanent support.1. Construct bracing per MCAA’s Council for Masonry Wall Bracing Standard

Practice for Bracing Masonry Walls Under Construction.2. Provide a plan for evacuation upon specific wind events.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniformthickness.

C. Coursing of Concrete Masonry Units:1. Bond: Running, detail to match existing.2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

[H11-00359]


3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

D. Placing And Bonding:1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints.2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.4. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.5. Interlock intersections and external corners.6. Align exposed interior faces of masonry flush, allowing block thickness variations

to appear on the unexposed exterior face.7. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where

adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace.8. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure straight, clean,

unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.9. When mortar has reached “thumb print” hardness, tool mortar joints concave.10. Isolate masonry from vertical structural framing members with movement joint as

indicated on Drawings.11. Isolate top of masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or

decks with compressible joint filler.

E. Cavity Wall: Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulated into cavity air space or to plugweeps. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation and air/vaporretarder adhesive.1. Install MDCD (mortar dropping collection device) material continuous at bottom of

cavity. Install on outside face of through wall flashing.

F. Joint Reinforcement And Anchorage:1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc.2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within

1/2 inch of dimensioned position.6. Embed anchors embedded in concrete.

G. Masonry Flashings:1. Extend flashings horizontally through outer wythe at foundation walls, above ledge

or shelf angles and lintels, under parapet caps, and at bottom of walls, and turndown on outside face to form drip.

2. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry seal tobacking.

3. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.4. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions.

H. Lintels:1. Install loose steel lintels over openings.2. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete

lintels are not scheduled or indicated.

[H11-00359]


3. Do not splice reinforcing bars.4. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement.5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.6. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary

supports.7. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.

I. Grouted Components:1. Lap splices bar diameters required by code.2. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement.3. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.4. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for minimum 12 inches either

side of opening.

J. Reinforced Masonry:1. Lay masonry units with core vertically aligned and cavities between wythes clear of

mortar and unobstructed.2. Place reinforcing, reinforcement bars, and grout as indicated on Drawings.3. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 03 20 00 and the plans.4. Support and secure reinforcement from displacement.5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.6. Place grout in accordance with ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures.

K. Control And Expansion Joints:1. Install control and expansion joints at the following maximum spacings, unless

otherwise indicated on Drawings:1. Exterior Walls: 20 feet on center and within 24 inches on one side of each

interior and exterior corner.2. Interior Walls: 30 feet on center.3. At changes in wall height.

2. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansionjoints.

3. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and cornerjoints.

4. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 90 00 for sealant performance.5. Form expansion joint by omitting mortar and cutting unit to form open space.

L. Built-In Work:1. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal

frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items tobe built-in the work and furnished by other sections.

2. Install built-in items plumb and level.3. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame

voids solid with grout or mortar. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum12 inches from framed openings.

4. Do not build in materials subject to deterioration.

M. Cutting And Fitting:

[H11-00359]


1. Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Coordinate with other sectionsof work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

2. Obtain Architect/Engineer’s approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work notindicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3. Perform Site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to ensure straight, clean,unchipped edges.


A. OWNER’S TESTING AGENCY shall perform field inspection and testing in accordancewith TMS 402-13/ACI 530-13/ASCE 5-13 as shown on the structural plans.

B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.

C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mortar/grout to Engineer/Architect for reviewprior to commencement of Work.

D. Masonry Inspections:1. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures.2. Periodic Inspection: Inspect prior to grouting.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Maximum Variations:1. From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch.2. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.3. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or

more.4. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼” per story non-cumulative; ½” in two stories or

more.5. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8” in 3 ft and ¼” in 10 ft; ½” in 30’.6. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.7. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.8. Maximum Variation for Steel Reinforcement:

1. Install reinforcement within tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 forfoundation walls.

2. Plus or minus 1/2 inch when distance from centerline of steel to oppositeface of masonry is 8 inches or less.

3. Plus or minus 1 inch when distance is between 8 and 24 inches.4. Plus or minus 1-1/4 inch when distance is greater than 24 inches.5. Plus or minus 2 inches from location along face of wall.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

[H11-00359]


C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protectingfinished Work.

B. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage.

C. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter.

D. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings andstaining caused by mortar.

E. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place without damagingmasonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when work is not inprogress.

END OF SECTION

[D119-18652]

Veneer Unit Masonry04 20 19 - 1

SECTION 04 20 19

VENEER UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:1. Facing brick and concrete masonry units.2. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 04 05 03 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: Product Requirements for

Mortar and grout.2. Section 04 20 16 – Reinforced Unit Masonry.3. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Execution requirements for loose steel

lintels, for placement by this section.4. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Product requirements for

reglets for flashings for placement by this section.5. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection: Rod and sealant at control / expansion joints.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement.2. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and

Steel Hardware.3. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for GeneralApplications.

4. ASTM A580 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire.5. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.6. ASTM A951 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint

Reinforcement.7. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building

Construction.8. ASTM C27 - Standard Classification of Fireclay and High-Alumina Refractory

Brick.9. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and

Structural Clay Tile.10. ASTM C73 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime

Brick).11. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.12. ASTM C126 - Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing

Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units.13. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry

Units.

[D119-18652]


14. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing ConcreteMasonry Units and Related Units.

15. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry UnitsMade from Clay or Shale).

16. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry UnitsMade From Clay or Shale).

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Submit data for brick masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement, wall ties,

anchors, and other accessories.2. Indicate initial rate of absorption for clay brick.

C. Samples: Submit samples of all veneer types to illustrate color, texture and color range.




1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum threeyears documented experience.

1.6 MOCKUP

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for mockup.

B. Construct mock-up of typical cavity wall illustrating materials interface and seals.1. Construct minimum 4’ wide by 6’ high panel, incorporating veneer brick, window

and sill, insulation, building corner condition, expansion joint, and flashing;2. Locate where directed by Architect/Owner.3. Schedule review with Architect/Owner to verify construction and obtain acceptance.

C. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum tenyears of experience.

[D119-18652]




B. Accept materials on site. Inspect for damage.





1.11 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate masonry work with installation of window and door anchors, and exteriorfixtures.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenanceproducts.

B. Supply 50 of each size, color, and type of brick units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VENEER UNIT MASONRY

A. Manufacturers, Concrete Masonry Veneer:1. Superior Block Co., 906-482-27312. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Manufacturers, Face Brick:1. Hebron Brick Company2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. FACING BRICK1. Select to match existing in color, texture, and dimension

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Ties: Pos-I-Tie by Heckmann Anchors.

[D119-18652]


1. Pos-I-Tie one piece barrel/screw, sized for depth of insulation and cavity drainmaterial.

2. Triangle Wire Tie: Length as required for air space and veneer.

B. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 03.

C. Composite Copper Flashings: self-adhering, polyethylene film laminated to copper sheet.1. Copper-Fabric SA manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, 5 oz.2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

D. Masonry Cavity Drain Material (MCDM): high density polyethylene mesh thicknessrequired to fill cavity space, shaped to ensure moisture drainage to cavity weeps.1. MortarTrap manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard.2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

E. Brick Expansion Joint: Emseal “Seismic Colorseal” polyurethane foam, color to matchmortar. Select size for each expansion joint location, per manufacturer’s specifications.

F. Cavity Weep/Vents: honeycomb design, polypropelene vent, thickness and depthrequired to fill head joint, color selected to match mortar color, insect resistant.1. Quadro-Vent, manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard.2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

G. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

B. Test brick efflorescence in accordance with ASTM C67. Brick rated greater than“slightly effloresced” is not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

C. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.

D. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.

B. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place untilbuilding structure provides permanent support.

[D119-18652]


C. Wet clay and shale brick before laying when initial rate of absorption is greater than 30grams when tested in accordance with ASTM C67.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniformthickness.

C. Coursing of Brick Units:1. Bond: Running.2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 x8 inches.3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

D. Placing And Bonding:1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints.2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.3. Not permitted: buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.5. Interlock intersections and external corners.6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where

adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace.7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure straight,

clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.8. Isolate masonry from vertical structural framing members with movement joint

as indicated on Drawings.9. Isolate top of masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or

decks with compressible joint filler.

E. Weeps and Vents: Provide weeps and vents in outer wythe at 24 inches oc horizontallyabove through-wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.Provide vents at top of wall for pressure equalization and cavity ventilation

F. Cavity Wall: Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plugweeps. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation and air/vaporretarder adhesive.1. Install cavity drain material continuous from bottom to top of cavity. Install on

outside face of through wall flashing.

G. Anchorage - Masonry Veneer:1. Install adjustable anchors per manufacturer’s instructions.2. Embed wall ties in masonry backing to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches oc

vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally. Place wall ties at maximum 8 inches ocvertically within 8 inches of jamb of wall openings.

H. Masonry Flashings:1. Extend flashings horizontally through outer wythe at foundation walls, above

ledge or shelf angles and lintels, under parapet caps, at bottom of walls; turndown on outside face to form drip.

[D119-18652]


2. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonrybacking.

3. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.4. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions.

I. Lintels:1. Install loose steel lintels over openings.2. Maintain required bearing on each side of opening.

J. Control And Expansion Joints:1. Install control and expansion joints at the following maximum spacings, unless

otherwise indicated on Drawings:a. Exterior Walls: 20 feet on center and within 24 inches on one side of

each interior and exterior corner.b. Interior Walls: 30 feet on center.c. At changes in wall height.

2. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansionjoints.

3. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and cornerjoints.

4. Size control joint to allow expansion and contraction of veneer masonry. Typicalgap shall be 5/8” at brick expansion joints, with maximum variation of 1/16”.

5. Form expansion joint by omitting mortar and cutting unit to form open space.

K. Built-In Work:1. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated

metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and otheritems to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections.

2. Install built-in items plumb and level.3. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame

voids solid with grout or mortar.4. Do not build in materials subject to deterioration.

L. Cutting And Fitting:1. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with

other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.2. Obtain Architect’s approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated

or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.



B. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: Pilasters: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.

E. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in twostories or more.

[D119-18652]


F. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8” in 3 ft and 1/4”in 10 ft; 1/2”in 30 ft.

G. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.

H. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.

3.5 CLEANING


B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protectingfinished Work.

B. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage.

C. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter.

D. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings andstaining caused by mortar.

E. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place withoutdamaging masonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when workis not in progress.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Steel Roof Decking05 31 23 - 1

SECTION 05 31 23

STEEL ROOF DECKING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Acoustical and non-acoustical steel roof deck and accessories.2. Formed steel cant strips, eave strips.3. Framing for openings up to and including 18 inches.4. Bearing plates and angles.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications: Support framing for deck openings and

ledger angles.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers:1. ASCE 3 - Standard Practice for the Construction and Inspection of Composite

Slabs.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.2. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.3. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with ImprovedFormability, Solution Hardened, and Baked Hardenable.

C. American Welding Society:1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Green Seal:1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.

E. Steel Deck Institute:1. SDI 29 - Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks.

F. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:1. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, Projections, openings, pertinentdetails, and accessories.

[H11-00359]


B. Product Data: Submit deck profile characteristics and dimensions, structural properties,finishes.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificates: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWSqualification within previous 12 months.

F. Fastener data: Submit manufacturers fastener data showing selected fasteners withfastener shear capacities in-lieu of welding deck. Fastener strength shall meet or exceedlisted weld strengths.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ASCE 3 for composite decks.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5years experience.

B. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, joints, under direct supervision of ProfessionalEngineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Michigan.



B. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.

C. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:1. United Steel Deck.2. Vulcraft Steel Deck.3. Wheeling Corrugating Co.4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, Grade 33 Structural Quality.

C. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36 steel, unfinished.

[H11-00359]


D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.

E. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, gray.

F. Factory Finish Painting: Specifications and Color per Section 09 90 00 – Painting andCoatings

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustical Insulation: Glass fiber type, minimum 1.1 lb/cu ft density; profiled to suitedeck; for installation by Roofing Contractor.

B. Sump Pans, Sump Plates, Eave Strips: Fabricated of metal of same type and finish asdeck.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Metal Deck: Sheet steel, configured as follows:1. Span Design: multiple.2. Minimum Metal Thickness Excluding Finish: per plans.3. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch, Type B profile4. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch.5. Side Joints: lapped.6. Galvanized finish

B. Related Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, cover plates, cant strips, 22 gage thickgalvanized sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated on drawings.

C. Roof Sump Pan: Fabricate of 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight.

D. Cant Strips: Formed sheet steel, 22 gage thick, 45 degree slope, 3 1/2 inch nominal widthand height, flange for attachment.

E. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Manual.

B. Bear deck on masonry support surfaces with 4 inch minimum bearing. Align and level.

[H11-00359]


C. Bear deck on steel supports with 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level.

D. Fasten ribbed deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports withfusion welds through weld washers at 36/4 pattern (4 fasteners per 36” sheet width).Fasten edges at 12” o.c.

E. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1.

F. Weld male/female side laps at 12 inches oc maximum.

G. Seal deck joints, laps, ends, and penetrations with sealant to achieve permanent air seal.

H. Reinforce steel deck openings from 6 to 18 inches in size with 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steelangles. Place framing angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyondeach side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.

I. Install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck, wheredeck changes direction. Fusion weld 12 inches oc maximum.

J. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and walls,columns, and openings.

K. Install single row of foam flute closures above walls and partitions perpendicular to deckflutes.

L. Position roof sump pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at eachdeck flute.

M. Place metal cant strips in position and fusion weld.

N. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds,burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up prime paint.


A. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Metal Fabrications05 50 00 - 1

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes shop fabricated metal items.1. Lintels.2. Ledge and shelf angles.3. Channel door frames.4. Bollards.5. Structural supports for miscellaneous attachments.6. Ladders.7. Handrail.8. Anchor bolts for sill plates.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for embedded

anchors and attachments for metal fabrications specified by this section inconcrete.

2. Section 04 20 16 – Reinforced Unit Masonry3. Section 04 20 19 – Veneer Unit Masonry4. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field applied paint finish.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association:1. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.2. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.3. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings

on Iron and Steel Products.4. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and

Steel Hardware.5. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000

PSI Tensile Strength.6. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,

120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.7. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel

Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners.8. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

[H11-00359]


9. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and SeamlessCarbon Steel Structural Tubing.

10. ASTM A554 - Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel MechanicalTubing.

11. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.12. ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

Vanadium Structural Steel.13. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet

and Plate.14. ASTM B210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Drawn Seamless Tubes.15. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar,

Rod, and Wire.16. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.17. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.18. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-

ksi Yield Strength.

C. American Welding Society:1. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive

Examination.2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.3. AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.

D. National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association:1. NOMMA Guideline 1 - Joint Finishes.

E. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.2. SSPC SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning.3. SSPC SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.4. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint.5. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage,size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, anddetails where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 weldingsymbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

C. Provide manufacturer’s certificate that materials are processed in the United States.


A. Finish joints in accordance with NOMMA Guideline 1.

[H11-00359]




B. Accept metal fabrications on site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather.

1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A572 - Grade 50, except channels and angles, ASTM A36.

B. Steel Plate: ASTM A36.

C. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40.

E. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, Grade 33 Structural Quality, galvanized with G90 coatingclass.

F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A1554; Grade 36.1. Finish: Unfinished or Hot dipped galvanized for exterior applications.

G. Bolts: ASTM 325, heavy-hex type.1. Finish: Unfinished. Hot dipped galvanized for exterior applications.

H. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex type.1. Finish: Unfinished. Hot dipped galvanized for exterior applications.

I. Washers: ASTM F436; Type 1.1. Finish: Unfinished. Hot dipped galvanized for exterior applications.2. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

J. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, gray oxide.

K. Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer.1. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in

accordance with GC-03.

L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 Type I Inorganic.

[H11-00359]


2.2 LINTELS

A. Lintels: Steel sections, size and configuration as indicated on Drawings, length to allow 8inches minimum bearing on both sides of opening U.N.O.1. Exterior Locations: Galvanized.2. Interior Locations: Prime paint, one coat.

2.3 LEDGE AND SHELF ANGLES

A. Ledge and Shelf Angles, Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metaldecking; galvanized, prime paint, one coat finish color per section 09 90 00.

2.4 BOLLARDS

A. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, 6 inches diameter, length as indicatedon Drawings; prime paint, one coat finish color per section 09 90 00.

B. Concrete Fill: 3,500 psi as specified in Section 03 30 00.

C. Anchors: Concealed type as indicated on Drawings.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS

A. Structural Supports: Steel sections, shape and size as indicated on Drawings required tosupport applied loads with maximum deflection of 1/240 of the span; one coat finishcolor per section 09 90 00.

2.6 LADDERS AND GUARDS

A. Fabricate ladders and guards to be in compliance with all OSHA and ADA requirementsat locations shown on the drawings.

B. Meet elevator manufacturer requirements.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.

D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed jointsbutt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Exposed Welded Joints: NOMMA Guideline 1 Joint Finish. Remove excess weldsplatter.

[H11-00359]


F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusivelylocated; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and relatedcomponents of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically notedotherwise.

2.8 FACTORY APPLIED FINISHES - STEEL

A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2.

B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

C. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.

D. Prime paint items with one coat except where galvanizing is specified.

E. Galvanizing: ASTM A123; hot dip galvanize after fabrication.

F. Galvanizing for Fasteners, Connectors, and Anchors:1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A153.

2.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with settingtemplates to appropriate sections.

[H11-00359]


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment,until permanent bracing and attachments are installed.

C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.

D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Obtain approval of Architect/Engineer prior to site cutting or making adjustments notscheduled.

F. After erection, touch up welds, abrasions, and damaged finishes with prime paint orgalvanizing repair paint to match shop finishes.


A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story or for every 12 ft in heightwhichever is greater, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

[D120-00183]

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Roof curbs cants and perimeter nailers.2. Blocking in roof openings.3. Wood furring and grounds.4. Concealed wood blocking for support of wall cabinets and accessories.5. Telephone and electrical panel backboards.6. Preservative treatment of wood.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American National Standards Institute:1. ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.

B. American Wood Protection Association:1. AWPA M4 - Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products.2. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.

C. ASTM International:1. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.2. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on

Iron and Steel.3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.4. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.

D. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau:1. SPIB - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber.

E. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology:1. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.2. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.3. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau:1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.

G. Western Wood Products Association:1. WWPA 2011 Western Lumber Grade Rules, including supplements.

[D120-00183]


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit technical data and application instructions on wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment materials.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics:1. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Maximum 25/450 flame-spread/smoke-developed

index when tested according to ASTM E84.

B. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify eachpreservative-treated and fire-retardant-treated material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Framing: SPF species; 19 percent maximum moisture content after treatment.

B. Plywood: APA-rated sheathing, Grade C-D; Exposure Durability 1.

2.2 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA U1, commodity specification A-sawnproducts or F-wood composites using waterborne ACQ preservative.

B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated, having flame spread of25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84 and showing no evidence of significantprogressive combustion when test is continued for an additional 20-minute period, interior type.

C. Moisture Content after Treatment: .1. Lumber: Maximum 19 percent.2. Structural Panels: Maximum 15 percent.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Fasteners: ASTM A153, hot-dip galvanized steel for high-humidity and treated woodlocations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667.3. Anchors:

a. Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.b. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete.

[D120-00183]


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installationexamination.

B. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive blocking, curbing, and framing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installationpreparation.

B. Coordinate placement of blocking, curbing, and framing items.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.

B. Place horizontal members, crown side up.

C. Construct curb members of solid wood sections.

D. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternatinglapping side members.

E. Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered.

F. Install telephone and electrical panel backboards with plywood sheathing material whererequired. Size backboards 12 inches beyond size of electrical and telephone panel.

END OF SECTION 061053

[D119-18652]

BOARD INSULATION 072113 - 1

SECTION 072113 - BOARD INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Rigid and semi-rigid board insulation at cavity wall construction and perimeter

foundation wall.


A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block.2. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.3. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.4. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation.5. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate

Thermal Insulation Board.6. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.7. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.8. ASTM E970 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Exposed Attic Floor

Insulation Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements.Board insulation shall comply with air barrier requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 for buildingenvelopes.

B. Materials of This Section: Provide thermal protection to vapor retarder in conjunction withvapor retarder materials in Section 07 26 00.

C. Materials of This Section: Provide thermal protection to air seal materials at building enclosureelements in conjunction with air barrier materials in Section 07 27 00.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information on product characteristics, performancecriteria, limitations and adhesives.

C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Submit special environmental conditions required forinstallation, and installation techniques.

[D119-18652]



A. Insulation Installed in Concealed Locations Surface Burning Characteristics::1. Foam Plastic Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame-spread/smoke-developed index when

tested according to ASTM E84.2. Other Insulation: Maximum 25/450 flame-spread/smoke-developed index when tested

according to ASTM E84.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIRLEMENTS

A. Section 016000 – Product Requirements.

B. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successfulinstallation.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01 10 00 – Summary: Work Sequence.

B. Sequence Work to ensure air barrier materials are in place before beginning Work of thissection.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Coordinate Work with Section 07 27 00 for installation of air seal materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BOARD INSULATION

A. Manufacturers:1. Dow Chemical – Extruded-Polystyrene Insulation.2. Owens Corning – Foamular Extruded-Polystyrene Insulation.3. Certain Teed – Extruded-Polystyrene Insulation.4. Substitutions: As specified in Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:1. Adhesives and Sealants: Maximum VOC content according to product and testing

requirements of CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174.

C. Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics:1. Interior Adhesives: Maximum VOC content according to SCAQMD Rule 1168.2. Interior Aerosol Adhesives: Maximum VOC content according to GS-36.

[D119-18652]


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation:1. Type: Cellular.2. Comply with ASTM C578, Type VI.3. Board Density: 1.8 lb / pcf.4. Board Size: 48 by 96 inches.5. Board Thickness: per drawings.6. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 5.0 per inch.7. Water Absorption:

a. Comply with ASTM D2842.b. Maximum: 0.10 percent by volume.

8. Minimum Compressive Strength: 25 psi.9. Board Edges: Square.

B. Polyisocyanurate Insulation:1. Description: Rigid board.2. Comply with ASTM C1289.3. Board Density: 2.0 pcf.4. Board Size: 48 by 96 inches.5. Board Thickness: as noted.6. Facing: foil-faced.7. Thermal Resistance: Aged R-factor of 6.0 per inch.8. Minimum Compressive Strength: 20 psi.9. Board Edges: Square.10. Water Absorption:

a. Comply with ASTM D2842.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Type as recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.

B. Tape:1. Material: Bright aluminum.2. Type: Self-adhering, mesh reinforced.3. Width: 2 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements

B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready to receiveinsulation and adhesive.

C. Verify that substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, and materials orsubstances affecting adhesive bond.

[D119-18652]


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Foundation Perimeter:1. Polyethylene Sheeting:

a. Adhere 4-inch-wide strip of polyethylene sheet over construction joints, withdouble beads of Type adhesive on each side of joint.

b. Tape to seal joints.c. Extend sheet full height of joint.

2. Apply adhesive in three continuous beads per board length to full bed 1/8 inch thick.3. Foundation Wall:

a. Install boards on foundation wall perimeter.b. Place boards in method to maximize contact bedding.c. Stagger side end joints and butt edges and ends tight to protrusions and adjacent

board.4. Extend boards over expansion joints unbonded to foundation and 12” on one side of joint.5. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane.

B. Cavity Walls:1. Secure impale fasteners to substrate at frequency of six per insulation board.2. Adhere polyethylene sheet over control joints, with double beads of adhesive on each

side of joint between sheets, and extend sheet full height of joint.3. Apply adhesive in three continuous beads per board length in continuous beads per board

length to full bed 1/8 inch thick on substrate, and daub adhesive tight to protrusions toensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal.

4. Install boards horizontally between wall reinforcement.5. Provide notches or groove in board to accommodate flashing termination bar.6. Place boards in method to maximize contact bedding.7. Stagger side end joints.8. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and protrusions.9. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane.10. Place 6-inch-wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, and tape-seal in

place to ensure continuity of insulation board vapor retarder and air seal.11. Foam/seal all board joints.

C. Under Concrete Slabs:1. Place insulation under slabs-on-grade after base for slab has been compacted.2. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane.3. Tape/seal board joints.4. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing slab.

3.3 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Do not permit damage to insulation prior to covering.


[D116-19652]

BLANKET INSULATION 072116 - 1

SECTION 072116 - BLANKET INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Batt insulation in wall construction.2. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior

walls and roofs.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 072113 - Board Insulation: Boards of polystyrene, polyurethane, or

polyisocyanurate foam, cellular glass, or rigid or semi-rigid glass fiber.2. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation.


A. ASTM International:1. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.2. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.3. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.4. ASTM E970 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Exposed Attic Floor

Insulation Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer data on product characteristics, performance criteria,limitations, and installation procedures.1. Samples: Provide 12”x12” sample of each type of insulation and vapor barrier.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics of Insulation Installed in Concealed Locations:1. Batt Insulation: Maximum 25/450 flame-spread/smoke-developed index when tested

according to ASTM E84.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section withminimum ten years' documented experience.

[D116-19652]



A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, andprotecting products.

B. Inspection:1. Provide only new materials in unopened packages.2. Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect for damage.

C. Protection:1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from

construction operations areas.2. Remove insulation that becomes wet or damp.3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BATT INSULATION

A. Manufacturers:1. CertainTeed Corporation.2. Johns Manville.3. Knauf Insulation.4. Owens Corning.5. Rockwool International.6. Substitutions: As specified in Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Performance and Design Criteria:1. Vapor Retarder Permeance: Maximum 1 perm when tested according to ASTM E96,

desiccant method.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Batt Insulation:1. Description: Preformed mineral-fiber batt roll, with friction fit.2. Thermal Resistance: R-60 or prescriptive R-value required to meet Michigan Energy

Code requirements for Building Envelope, whichever is greater.

B. Sheet Vapor Retarder:1. Description: polyethylene film for above-grade applications.2. Thickness: as required for perm rating less than 1.0.

C. Staples:1. Material: Steel wire.2. Type and Size: To suit application.

D. Tape:1. Material: Bright aluminum.

[D116-19652]


2. Type: Self-adhering.3. Width: 2 inches.

E. Insulation keeper:1. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for applicationexamination.

B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in exterior ceiling spaces without gaps or voids.

B. Do not compress insulation.

C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.

D. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

E. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical serviceswithin plane of insulation.1. Retain in place with wire mesh secured to framing members.2. Tape-seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.

F. Vapor Retarder:1. Install insulation with factory-applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of

building spaces.2. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members.

G. Tape-seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.

H. Wood Framing:

1. Place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches o.c.2. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.

I. Extend vapor retarder tight to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and to otheritems interrupting plane of membrane and tape-seal in place.


[C59-18281]

ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT073010 - 1

Grace Ice & Water Shield designed for severe climate applications where the membrane must withstandin-service temperatures up to 180F. Excludes applications in the Desert Southwest US and high altitudeclimates where copper, zinc or Cor-Ten roof coverings are used.

SECTION 073010

ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT

Grace Ice & Water Shield

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies a self-adhering sheet membrane used as underlayment for sloped roofs.

1. Severe climate application, 180F resistance, Grace Ice & Water Shield.

B. Related Sections: Refer to the following specification sections for coordination:

1. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry.2. Section 073113 - Asphalt Shingles.3. Section 073116 - Metal Shingles.4. Section 073119 - Mineral-Fiber Cement Shingles.5. Section 073126 - Slate Shingles.6. Section 073129 - Wood Shingles and Shakes.7. Section 073200 - Roof Tiles.8. Section 076100 - Sheet Metal Roofing.

C. Referenced Standards: Comply with the requirements of the following standards published byASTM International to the extent referenced in this section.

1. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and ThermoplasticElastomers - Tension.

2. ASTM D461 - Standard Test Methods for Felt.3. ASTM D 903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds.4. ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.5. ASTM D3767 - Standard Practice for Rubber—Measurement of Dimensions.6. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.7. ASTM G90 – EMMAqua test.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and

[C59-18281]


applicable codes at the location of the project.

B. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience producing roofing underlayment.

C. Installer: Minimum 2 years experience with installation of similar underlayment.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Protect from damage.

B. Cover materials and store in dry condition between temperatures of 40 and 90 degrees F (5 and32 degrees C). Use within one year of date of manufacture. Do not store at elevatedtemperatures as that will reduce the shelf life of the product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer: Grace Construction Products, 62 Whittemore Avenue, Cambridge, MA 02140,Toll Free 866-333-3726, www.na.graceconstruction.com.

1. Substitutions: As specified in Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Roof Underlayment: Provide Grace Ice and Water Shield byGrace Construction Products with the following characteristics:

1. Material: Cold applied, self adhering membrane composed of a high strengthpolyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive andinterwound with a disposable release sheet. An embossed, slip resistant surface isprovided on the polyethylene.

2. Color: Gray-black.3. Membrane Thickness: 40 mil (1.02 mm) ASTM D3767 procedure A (Section 9.1).4. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi (1720 kN/m2) ASTM D412 (Die C modified).5. Elongation, Membrane: 250% ASTM D412 (Die C modified).6. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected @ -20°F (-29°C) ASTM D1970.7. Adhesion to Plywood: 3.0 lbs/in. width (525 N/m) ASTM D903.8. Permeance (Max): 0.05 Perms (2.9 ng/m2s Pa) ASTM E96.9. Material Weight Installed (Max): 0.3 lb/ft2 (1.3 kg/m2) ASTM D461.10. Service Temperature: 180 degrees F (82.2 degrees C) per ASTM D120411. Primer: Water-based Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer by Grace Construction Products.12. Code and Standards Compliance: Grace Ice and Water Shield meets the following:

a. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Class A fire classification under fiber-glass shinglesand Class C under organic felt shingles (per ASTM E108/UL 790).

b. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Classified Sheathing Material Fire ResistanceClassification with Roof Designs: P225, P227, P230, P237, P259, P508, P510, P512,P514, P701, P711, P717, P722, P723, P732, P734, P736, P742, P803, P814, P818,P824.

[C59-18281]


c. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO-ES) Report No. 3997.d. Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI PST & ESI) Report No.

94133C.e. Building Officials and Code Administrators (BOCA-ES) Evaluation Report No. 94-

33.f. Miami-Dade County Code Report NOA 02-113.02.g. Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC) 12693-Rh. U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) Materials Release

1056f.i. City of Los Angeles RR 25330j. Florida State Approval Report No. FL298-R1

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to start of installation, inspect existing conditions to ensure surfaces are suitable forinstallation of roofing underlayment. Verify flashing has been installed. Starting work indicatesinstallers acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Install roofing underlayment on sloped surfaces at locations indicated on theDrawings, but not less than at hips, ridges, eaves, valleys, sidewalls and chimneys, and surfacesover interior space within 36 inches (914 mm) from the inside face of the exterior wall.Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions including but not limited to thefollowing:

1. Schedule installation such that underlayment is covered by roofing within the publishedexposure limit of the underlayment.

2. Do not install underlayment on wet or frozen substrates.3. Install when surface temperature of substrate is a minimum of 40 degrees F (5 degrees C)

and rising.4. Remove dust, dirt, loose materials and protrusions from deck surface.5. Install membrane on clean, dry, continuous structural deck. Fill voids and damaged or

unsupported areas prior to installation.6. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces using specified primer at a rate of 500-600 square

feet per gallon (12-15 sqm/L). Priming is not required for other suitable clean and drysurfaces.

7. Install membrane such that all laps shed water. Work from the low point to the high pointof the roof at all times. Apply the membrane in valleys before the membrane is applied tothe eaves. Following placement along the eaves, continue application of the membrane upthe roof. Membrane may be installed either vertically or horizontally after the firsthorizontal course.

8. Side laps minimum 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) and end laps minimum 6 inches (152 mm)following lap lines marked on underlayment.

9. Patch penetrations and damage using manufacturer’s recommended methods.

[C59-18281]


3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protection: Protect from damage during construction operations and installation of roofingmaterials. Promptly repair any damaged or deteriorated surfaces.

B. Repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and replace work whichcannot be satisfactorily repaired in the opinion of the Architect.

C. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time offinal acceptance. Remove protective film and reclean as necessary immediately before finalacceptance.

END OF SECTION

W. R. Grace & Co. -Conn. hopes the information here will be helpful. It is based upon data andknowledge considered to be true and accurate and is offered for the users’ consideration, investigationand verification, but we do not warrant the results to be obtained. Please read all statements,recommendations or suggestions in conjunction with our conditions of sale, which apply to all goodssupplied by us. No statement, recommendation or suggestion is intended for any use which wouldinfringe any patent or copyright. W. R. Grace & Co. -Conn., 62 Whittemore Avenue, Cambridge, MA02140. In Canada, W. R. Grace & Co. Canada, Ltd., 294 Clements Road, West, Ajax, Ontario, CanadaL1S 3C6. Grace Ice & Water Shield, Perm-A-Barrier are registered trademarks of W. R. Grace & Co. -Conn. Cor-Ten is a registered trademark assigned to USX Corporation. Copyright 2009 W. R. Grace &Co. -Conn.

[C59-18281]

METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 1

SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Architectural batten seam metal roofing.


A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:

1. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Proceduresfor Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

2. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Proceduresfor High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

3. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Proceduresfor Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

B. American Iron and Steel Institute:

1. AISI NASPEC - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed SteelStructural Members.

C. American Society of Civil Engineers:

1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

D. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. ASTM A755/A755M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by theHot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior ExposedBuilding Products.

3. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet andPlate.

4. ASTM C1371 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials NearRoom Temperature Using Portable Emissometers.

5. ASTM C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance NearAmbient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.

6. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Usedin Roofing and Waterproofing.

7. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer ModifiedBituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice DamProtection.

[C59-18281]


8. ASTM D2178/D2178M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofingand Waterproofing.

9. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.

10. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.

11. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage ThroughExterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure DifferencesAcross the Specimen.

12. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

13. ASTM E408 - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces UsingInspection-Meter Techniques.

14. ASTM E903 - Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, andTransmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.

15. ASTM E1918 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal andLow-Sloped Surfaces in the Field.

16. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontaland Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.

E. Federal Specification Unit:

1. FS TT-C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant.

F. National Roofing Contractors Association:

1. NRCA - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

G. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association:

1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

H. UL:

1. UL 580 - Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

I. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency:

1. ENERGY STAR - ENERGY STAR Voluntary Labeling Program.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:

1. Submit fabricator information on metal types, finishes, and characteristics.2. Submit color charts for finish selection.

C. Shop Drawings:

[C59-18281]


1. Indicate metal roofing and soffit panel profiles, jointing patterns, jointing details,fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.


A. Calculate structural properties of framing members according to AISI NASPEC.

B. Perform Work according to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating products specified in this Section withminimum three years' documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'documented experience and approved by fabricator.



B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect fordamage.

C. Storage:

1. Store materials according to fabricator instructions.2. Stack material to provide ventilation and to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion.3. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

D. Protection:

1. Prevent contact with materials causing discoloration or staining.2. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from

construction operations areas.3. Provide additional protection according to fabricator instructions.

1.7 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements:

1. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.2. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

[C59-18281]


1.8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL ROOFING

A. Manufacturers:

1. McElroy Metal2. Substitutions: As specified in Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Architectural Standing Seam Metal Roofing:

1. Description: Factory-formed metal roofing panel system with concealed fasteners.2. Panels:

a. Steel Sheet:

1) Material: Prefinished galvalume.2) Base Metal Thickness: 0.024 inch.

b. Nominal Width: 16 inches.

c. Profile: striated

3. Seams:

a. Type: Sanding with snap-on cover.

b. Height: .6875”

c. Color: As selected.

C. Metal Soffit Panels:

1. Description: Factory-formed metal soffit panel system with concealed fasteners.2. Panels:

a. Steel Sheet:

1) Material: Prefinished galvanized.2) Base Metal Thickness: 0.024 inch.

b. Nominal Width: 12 inches.c. Nominal Depth: 1/2 inch.d. Profile: Ribbed solid and perforated.e. Joint Type: Interlocked.

3. Color: As selected.

[C59-18281]


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal:

1. Prefinished Galvalume Steel Sheet:

a. Description: Coil coated.b. Comply with ASTM A755/A755M.c. Base Metal:

1) Comply with ASTM A792/A792M.

d. Exposed Finish Coating: Kynar 500 (PVDF).

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Form section shapes as indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortionor defects. Radius per elevation.

B. Fasciae, Trim, Flashings, and Other Metal Components:

1. Same material as metal roof panels.2. Provide exposed metal surfaces with same finish as exposed face of metal roof panels.

C. Cleats:

1. Material: Same as sheet.2. Interlock with sheet.

D. Starter Strips:

1. Description: Continuous, to interlock with sheet.2. Material: Same as sheet.

E. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.

F. Hems and Seams:

1. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to formdrip.

2. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch.3. At moving joints, use sealed and lapped bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

G. Corners:

1. One piece.2. Minimum Leg Length: 18 inches.3. Miter and seam corners and seal with sealant.

H. Flashings:

[C59-18281]


1. Allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing.2. Return and brake edges.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners:

1. Material: Type as recommended by roofing fabricator.2. Washers: Same material as fasteners.

B. Ice Dam Membrane:

1. Description: Self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet material.2. Comply with ASTM D1970/D1970M.3. Surface: Slip resistant.4. Size: 40 mils thick and 36 inches wide.5. Furnish strippable release paper to expose adhesive surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Wood and Metal Deck Substrate:

1. Inspect roof deck to verify that deck is clean and smooth; free of depressions, waves, orprojections; and properly sloped.

2. Verify that deck is dry and free of snow and ice.3. Verify that substrate joints are solidly supported and fastened.

C. Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set,reglets are in place, and nailing strips are located properly.

D. Verify that roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

E. Verify that insulation is installed and ready for roof application.

3.2 PREPARATION


B. Wood and Metal Deck Substrate:

[C59-18281]


1. Fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler at areas of bonded eave protection.2. Broom clean deck surfaces under eave protection and underlayment.

C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals withprotective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15 mils.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Underlayment:

1. Apply underlayment over entire roof area in single layer fastened to substrate.2. Lay perpendicular to slope.3. Weather-lap edges 2 inches and nail in place.4. Stagger end joints minimum 24 inches.5. Apply slip sheet in one layer, laid loose.

B. Standing Seam Metal Roofing:

1. Comply with SMACNA details.2. Panels:

a. Begin installation at eaves.b. Long dimension perpendicular to eaves.c. Lap ends minimum 6 inches.d. Install clips to secure roof panels without deforming roof panels.

3. Stagger transverse-lapped joints of roofing sheets.4. Standing Seams:

a. Machine-form standing seam between adjacent roofing panels, or hand-form jointswhere machine forming is not possible.

5. Termination:

a. Terminate roofing panels with sheet metal trim and flashing for watertightinstallation.

b. Close and conceal openings between roofing panels, panel seams, and roofsubstrate.

6. Seal metal joints watertight.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finishedWork.

B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface.


[D119-18652]

Elastomeric Membrane Roofing - Fully Adhered07 53 03 - 1

SECTION 075303 - ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING - FULLY ADHERED

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sheathing over metal deck surface; insulation; and membrane roofing base;flashings; roofing membrane expansion joints and counterflashings.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 053123 - Steel Roof Decking.2. Section 061053 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers.3. Section 070150 – Maintenance of Membrane Roofing4. Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashing.5. Section 221400 - Facility Storm Drainage: Roof drains.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:1. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.2. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.3. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate

Thermal Insulation Board.4. ASTM C1371 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near

Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers.5. ASTM C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near

Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.6. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic

Elastomers-Tension.7. ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized

Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.8. ASTM D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and

Elastomers by Impact.9. ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint

and Related Coatings.10. ASTM D1004 - Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of Plastic Film

and Sheeting.11. ASTM D4434 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing.12. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof

Membrane.13. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.14. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.15. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.16. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials.

[D119-18652]


17. ASTM E408 - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of Surfaces UsingInspection-Meter Techniques.

B. FM Global:1. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof Deck Securement.2. FM 4450 - Approval Standard for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs.

C. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):1. WH - Certification Listings.

D. National Roofing Contractors Association:1. NRCA - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

E. Single Ply Roofing Institute:1. SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing

Systems.

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.2. UL 790 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials.3. UL 1256 - Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction.4. UL 1897 - Uplift Tests for Roof Covering Systems.

G. International Energy Code:1. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2013: Building Envelope Requirements.


A. Elastomeric Sheet Membrane Conventional Roofing System: One ply membrane system withinsulation and adhesive applied membrane finish.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Low Slope Membrane Roof Edge Securement: Conform to SPRI ES-1 for wind speedsdetermined from applicable code.1. Design for wind speeds identified in Structural drawings.

B. Vapor barrier, insulation, EPDM membrane, and adhesives from a single manufacturer,designed as a complete system, over an approved substrate, for a 30-year manufacturerwarranty.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting plan for tapered insulation, joint and termination detailconditions, conditions of interface with other materials. Indicate membrane layout and seamlocations.

[D119-18652]


C. Product Data: Submit characteristics on membrane materials, adhesives, seaming materials,flashing materials, insulation, and vapor retarders.

D. Manufacturer’s Certification:1. Current letter of certification from the Manufacturer, testifying to the experience, high

quality of installation, and customer service provided by the installing contractor.2. Design compliance letter from the Manufacturer’s engineering group, verifying the

specifications meet or exceed the requirements for the project’s warranty and wind speed.

E. Samples: Submit two, 6x6 inch in size illustrating insulation, adhesive, membrane.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special precautions required for seaming.

G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed; ambient temperatures, humidity,wind velocity during application, and items requiring correction.1. Intermediate inspection by manufacturer’s representative.2. Final inspection by manufacturer’s field inspector.3. Submit manufacturer’s report to Owner and Architect within 48 hours of inspection.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics:1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in

accordance with ASTM E84.2. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each roof

assembly component.

C. Roof Maintenance and Service Agreement: Provide inspection and maintenance on twooccasions within the first year: one after the spring melt and the second after one summer andprior to the next school year, as follows:1. Inspection shall be performed by the manufacturer’s authorized field inspector with

observation by the Owner’s representative.2. Inspect the entire roof area for damage that may have resulted from foreign debris or

human activity.3. Inspect entire membrane to verify there are no gaps or voids between the membrane and

substrate.4. Verify no lifting has occurred in the system, either from wind uplift, adhesive failure in

the system, or other cause.5. Remove debris that may have accumulated to ensure positive roof drainage and to avoid

roof membrane damage.6. Inspect and clean all roof drains, overflow drains, and scupper drains to ensure a free

flow of rain water and snow melt.7. Inspect field seams, roof curbs, and roof penetrations. Verify no voids have developed at

seams.8. Inspect sheet metal flashings and counter flashings at copings, gutters collector boxes,

and downspouts.9. Verify equipment access doors and covers are installed and secured.

[D119-18652]


10. Submit a written report to the building owner detailing the current roof condition,evidence of any roof abuse, and any problems that could potentially lead to future roofproblems.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section withminimum seven years documented experience.

B. Installing Contractor:1. Company specializing in performing Work of this section2. Company with minimum seven years documented experience3. Company recognized by roofing manufacturer as a “Top Tier” or “Master” installer.

C. Installing Contractor’s Representative1. Applicator certified, trained and approved by manufacturer.2. Manufacturer-trained applicator On-site for the duration of the roofing installation

1.8 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVES:1. Field Inspector: Trained and authorized employee of the roofing manufacturer to inspect

roofing installations for compliance with standards and to provide a list of any necessaryrepairs for warranty.

2. Representative: trained by the manufacturer on products, assemblies, and warrantyrequirements and policies. Assumes authority to provide direction to the installer onbehalf of the manufacturer. Minimum five years’ experience.


A. General Contractor shall schedule pre-installation meeting one week in advance. Meeting shallbe held at a minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section at the project site.

B. General Contractor shall prepare the agenda and have agenda approval by the Architect.

C. General Contractor shall facilitate the meeting and prepare minutes. Distribute minutes to allparticipants within 48 hours of the meeting.

D. Agenda shall include:1. Review preparation and installation procedures, coordination and scheduling, and

interface with related Work.2. Demonstrate sequence of operation with actual materials and/or video to represent

conditions of the installation. Allow questions from Owner and Architect.3. Demonstration and discussion shall include substrate material, insulation, membrane,

vapor barrier, adhesives, fasteners, roof edge, flashing, etc., as relevant to the project.4. Identify any requirements in the Project Documents that conflict with the manufacturer’s

recommendations, building code, or other regulatory requirements.5. Review warranty coverage, protection, and limitations.6. Review procedure for warranty call-backs.

E. Require attendance of Owner’s representative, architect, roofing installer, and roofingmanufacturer’s authorized representative.

[D119-18652]




B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labelsintact.

C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.

D. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.


A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather ambient temperatures below orabove manufacturer’s acceptable temperature range.

C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation isexpected or occurring.

D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can beweatherproofed during same day.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Coordinate Work with installation of associated roof penetrations and metal flashings, as Workof this section proceeds.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.

B. Furnish 20 year manufacturer's warranty including coverage of materials and installation anddamage resulting from failure to resist penetration of moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE PLY ROOFING - FULLY ADHERED

A. Manufacturers:1. Carlisle Syntec, SureSeal EPDM.2. Firestone Building Products, RubberGard EPDM.3. Versico Roofing Systems, VersiGard EPDM.4. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

[D119-18652]


2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Membrane: ASTM D4637; Type I EPDM; non-reinforced, .060 inch thick; conforming to thefollowing criteria:

Properties Test ResultsTensile Strength ASTM D412 1425 psi minimumElongation ASTM D412 450% minimumTear Strength ASTM D624 200 lbf/in minimumFactory Seam Strength Modified ASTM D816 Membrane FailureLow Temperature Brittleness ASTM D746 -49 d FResistance to Water Absorption ASTM D-471 +2.0 % MaximumWater Vapor Permeance (perms) ASTM E96 0.05 perms Maximum

B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

C. Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, Class I, faced rigid cellular polyisocyanurate roof insulation,with the following characteristics:1. Board Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft.2. Board Thickness: as required to meet or exceed specified R-value, in conjunction with

coverboard.a. Minimum R-value required by ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2013 for Building

Envelopes for the Climate Zone in the location of this project.3. Board Edges: square.4. Facing: glass reinforced mat facer, both sides.5. Long Term Thermal Resistance: R factor specified, as determined by ASTM C177.6. Compressive Strength: Minimum 20 psi.

D. Coverboard: ½” high-density closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core bonded to performancecoated glass facer, designed for use as a coverboard for the roofing system specified.

E. Flexible Flashings: Same material as membrane.

F. Counterflashings: Aluminum metal, as specified in Section 076200.

G. Insulation Adhesive: two-component, low-rise polyurethane, similar to I.S.O. Stick InsulationAdhesive.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by system manufacturer;length required for thickness of material with metal washers; length as required to secureinsulation in place with minimum projection below structural deck allowed by systemmanufacturer.

B. Insulation Joint Tape: Asphalt treated glass fiber reinforced; 6 inches wide; self adhering.

C. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

D. Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized steel; maximum possible lengths, with attachment flanges.

[D119-18652]


E. Walkway Pads: by roofing manufacturer. 8’ wide continuous where shown on drawings.

F. Stack Boots: Flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive Work.

C. Verify deck is supported and secure.

D. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped todrains, and suitable for installation of roof system.

E. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.

F. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with moisture content acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

G. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, andcant strips and reglets are in place.

H. Commencing roof system installation represents that the General Contractor and roofingSubcontractor accept the substrate for all purposes related to roof systems and warranties.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Application:1. Mechanically fasten insulation to deck.2. Apply adhesive to top surface of insulation. Embed second layer of insulation into

adhesive, with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of first layer.3. Place minimum of two constant thickness layers with joints staggered and tapered

thickness insulation layer to required slope pattern.4. Minimum Total Insulation Thickness: as required to achieve minimum aged insulation R-

Value specified and as required by International Energy Code.5. Place boards perpendicular to deck flutes with edges over flute surface for bearing

support.6. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to

perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.7. Lay tapered boards for distance of 24 inches back from roof drains for positive drainage.8. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.9. Apply coverboard.10. Tape joints of insulation.

B. Membrane Application:1. Apply adhesive at manufacturer’s recommended rate.

[D119-18652]


2. Roll out membrane, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears. Firmly press sheet into placewithout stretching.

3. Bond sheet to substrate except those areas directly over or within 3 inches of control orexpansion joint.

4. Overlap edges and ends and seal by contact tape, minimum 6 inches. Seal permanentlywaterproof.

5. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Apply joint tape and seal.6. Extend membrane up cant strips minimum of 6 inches onto vertical surfaces.7. Seal membrane around roof penetrations.

C. Flashings And Accessories:1. Apply flexible flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements.2. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings.3. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane.4. Install walkway pads.


A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Require site attendance of roofing materials' manufacturer’s representative on at least twooccasions during installation of the Work and final inspection (minimum three inspections).Reinspect as necessary to confirm that all repairs have been completed to specifications.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by Work of this section, consult manufacturer ofsurfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.

C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this section.


A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing Work.

C. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces.

END OF SECTION

[D116-19652]

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim07 62 00 - 1

SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes flashings and counterflashings.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Through-wall flashings in masonry.2. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry.3. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection.4. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.5. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Roof curbs for

mechanical equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:1. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.2. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.3. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.4. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.2. ASTM A625/A625M - Standard Specification for Tin Mill Products, Black Plate, Single

Reduced.3. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.4. ASTM A755/A755M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-

Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed BuildingProducts.

5. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.6. ASTM B101 - Standard Specification for Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building

Construction.7. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.8.9. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.10. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate

Products.11. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing

and Waterproofing.

[D116-19652]


12. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.

13. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.

C. Copper Development Association Inc.:1. CDA - Copper in Architecture - Handbook.

D. Federal Specification Unit:1. FS TT-C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant.

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,flashings, terminations, and installation details.

C. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and characteristics.

D. Samples:1. Submit one samples, 4 inch in length illustrating typical profile, material and finish.2. Submit two samples 2x2 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal work with minimum three yearsdocumented experience.


A. Coinciding with Section 075353 pre-installation meeting.



B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metalsheets to ensure drainage.

C. Prevent contact with materials causing discoloration or staining.

1.7 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate with Work of Section 04 20 00 for installing recessed flashing reglets.

[D116-19652]


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Manufacturers:1. Metal-Era.2. Pac-Clad.3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A755/A755M; structural steel sheet, G90 zinccoating; 24 gauge core steel, shop pre-coated with two coat fluoropolymer top coat; color asselected from manufacturer's standard color (minimum 16 colors from which to select.)

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal.

B. Reglets: Recessed type, galvanized steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Form sections shape indicated on Drawings, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion ordefects.

B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet metal, interlocking with sheet.

C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity.

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.

G. Seal metal joints.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Fluoropolymer Coating: Multiple coat as specified for sheet metal system, thermally cured,conforming to AAMA 2605.

B. Washcoat: Finish concealed side of metal sheets with washcoat compatible with finish system, asrecommended by finish system manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


[D116-19652]


B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets inplace, and nailing strips located.

C. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Install surface mounted reglets to lines and levels indicated on Drawings. Seal top of reglets withsealant.

C. Paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15mil.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. See Section 04 20 00 for installation of concealed reglets.

B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners.

C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and linesaccurate to profiles.

E. Seal metal joints watertight.


A. Section 07 53 03 – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Field inspecting of adhered roofing andterminal flashings.

B. Inspection will involve surveillance of Work during installation to ascertain compliance withspecified requirements.

END OF SECTION

[D119-18652]

JOINT PROTECTION 079000 - 1

SECTION 079000 - JOINT PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sealants and joint backing.2. Accessories.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 04 20 19 – Veneer Unit Masonry2. Section 078400 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.3. Section 088000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.


A. ASTM International:1. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.2. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.3. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.4. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.5. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or

Expanded Rubber.6. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell).7. ASTM D2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint

Seals for Concrete Pavements.

B. California Department of Health Services:1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions

from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.

C. South Coast Air Quality Management District:1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Sections referencing this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information indicating sealant chemical characteristics,performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.

[D119-18652]


C. Samples: Submit two samples, 2 inches in size, illustrating sealant colors for selection.

D. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit special procedures, surface preparation requirements, andperimeter conditions requiring special attention.1. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories failing to achieve seal,

exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, and sealants which do not cure.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section withminimum three years' documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum threeyears' documented experience.

1.6 MOCKUPS

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for mockup.

B. Construct mockup of sealant joints in conjunction with window and wall mockups as specifiedin other Sections.

C. Construct mockup with specified sealant types and with other components as indicated.

D. Preparation and Priming:1. Determine requirements based on manufacturer recommendations.2. Correct failure of sealant tests on mockup if required.

E. Verify that sealants, primers, and other components do not stain adjacent materials.

F. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer.

G. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.



B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging and inspect fordamage.

C. Store products according to manufacturer instructions.

D. Protection:1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from

construction operations areas.2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

[D119-18652]


1.8 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient conditioncontrol facilities for product storage and installation.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by sealant manufacturer during and afterinstallation.

1.9 WARRANTY


B. Furnish two-year installer's warranty.

C. Include coverage for:1. Installed sealants and accessories failing to achieve airtight and watertight seal.2. Installed sealants and accessories exhibiting loss of adhesion or cohesion.3. Sealants that do not cure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Dow Corning Corp.2. GE Silicones3. Pecora Corp.4. Sika Corp.5. Tremco Sealants & Waterproofing6. Construction Specialties, Inc. (Masonry Expansion Joint Filler)7. Substitutions: As specified in Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 JOINT SEALERS BY APPLICATION

A. High-Performance General-Purpose Exterior (Nontraffic) Sealant:1. Material: Silicone.2. Comply with ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A.3. Type: Single-component.4. Color: Standard; match finished surfaces.5. Applications:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.b. Joints between concrete and other materials.c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.d. Other exterior nontraffic joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

B. General-Purpose Exterior (Nontraffic) Sealant:1. Description: Acrylic; solvent-release curing.2. Comply with ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M, G, and A.

[D119-18652]


3. Type: Single- or multiple-component.4. Color: Standard; match finished surfaces.5. Applications:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.b. Joints between concrete and other materials.c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.d. Other exterior nontraffic joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

C. General-Purpose Traffic-Bearing Sealant:1. Material: Polyurethane.2. Comply with ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.3. Type: Single- or multiple-component.4. Color: Standard; match finished surfaces.5. Applications: Exterior and interior pedestrian and vehicular traffic-bearing joints.

D. Exterior Compressible Gasket Expansion Joint Sealer:1. Description: Hollow neoprene (polychloroprene) compression gasket.2. Comply with ASTM D2628.3. Color: Black.4. Size and Shape: As indicated on Drawings.5. Applications: Exterior wall expansion joints.

E. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant:1. Material: Butyl or polyisobutylene.2. Type: Non-drying, non-skinning, non-curing.3. Applications: Concealed sealant bead in sheet metalwork and siding overlaps.

F. General Purpose Interior Sealant:1. Material: Acrylic-emulsion latex.2. Comply with ASTM C834.3. Type: Single-component; paintable.4. Color: Standard; match finished surfaces.5. Applications:

a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

G. Sanitary Sealant:1. Material: Silicone.2. Comply with ASTM C920, Uses M and A.3. Type: Single-component; mildew resistant.4. Color: Clear.5. Applications:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.b. Joints between countertops and wall surfaces.

H. Acoustical Sealant:1. Material: Butyl or acrylic.2. Comply with ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A.3. Type: Single-component; solvent-release curing; non-skinning.4. Applications: Concealed locations only at acoustically rated construction.

[D119-18652]


2.3 JOINT SEALERS BY TYPE

A. Acrylic-Emulsion Latex Sealant:1. Comply with ASTM C834.2. Type: Single-component; non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging.3. Color: Standard; match finished surfaces.4. Movement Capability: 2 to 5 percent.5. Service Temperature Range: 2 to 160 deg. F.6. Hardness Range: Shore A, 15 to 40.

B. Acrylic Sealant:1. Comply with ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, and O.2. Type: Single-component; solvent release curing; non-staining, non-bleeding, non-

sagging.3. Color: Standard; match finished surfaces.4. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent.5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 13 to plus 180 deg. F.6. Hardness Range: Shore A, 25 to 50.

C. Butyl Sealant:1. Comply with ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Use NT.2. Type: Single-component; solvent release curing; non-skinning, non-sagging.3. Color: As selected.4. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent.5. Service Temperature Range: Minus13 to plus 180 deg. F.6. Hardness Range: Shore A, 10 to 30.

D. Silicone Sealant:1. Comply with ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT and A.2. Type: Single-component; neutral curing; non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding;

fungus resistant.3. Color: Standard, match finished surfaces Clear.4. Movement Capability: Plus 40 percent, minus 25 percent.5. Service Temperature Range: Minus 65 to plus 180 deg. F.6. Hardness Range: Shore A, 15 to 35.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer:1. Type: Non-staining.2. As recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner:1. Type: Non-corrosive and non-staining.2. As recommended by sealant manufacturer.3. Compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing:1. Description: Round foam rod, compatible with sealant.2. Comply with ASTM D1056, sponge or expanded rubber D1667, closed-cell PVC.3. Size: Oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

[D119-18652]


D. Bond Breaker:1. Description: Pressure-sensitive tape.2. As recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive Work of this Section.

C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for applicationpreparation.

B. Comply with ASTM C1193.

C. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.

D. Clean and prime joints.

E. Protect elements surrounding Work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Comply with ASTM C1193.

B. Acoustical Sealant:1. Comply with ASTM C919.2. Provide sealant bead between top stud runner and structure, and between bottom stud

track and floor.

C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neckdimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specificdimensions are indicated on Drawings.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Apply sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Joint Tooling: Concave.

G. Precompressed Foam Sealant:1. Do not stretch.

[D119-18652]


2. Avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections.3. Apply with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

H. Compression Gaskets:1. Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections.2. Seal joints with adhesive.3. Install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finishedWork.

B. Protect sealants until cured.


[D119-18652]

STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081213 - 1

SECTION 081213 - STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire rated and non-rated steel frames for doors and interior glazed lights.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors into masonry wall.2. Section 042016 – Reinforced Unit Masonry: Masonry grout fill of metal frames and

placement of anchors into masonry wall construction. Not in table of contents3. Section 081314 - Standard Steel Doors.4. Section 081416 – Flush Wood Doors.5. Section 087100 - Door Hardware: Hardware and weatherstripping.6. Section 088000 - Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:1. ANSI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. National Fire Protection Association:1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.2. NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and other Opening

Protectives.3. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, anchor types and spacing, location ofcut-outs for hardware, and finish.

C. Product Data: Submit frame configuration and finishes.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions.

[D119-18652]




A. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8.

B. Fire Rated Frame Construction: Conform to one of the following:1. NFPA 252; with neutral pressure level at 40 inches maximum above sill at 5 minutes into

test.2. UL 10C.3. 20-Minute Fire Rated Corridor and Smoke Barrier Frames: Fire tested without hose

stream test.

C. Installed Fire Rated Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class same as firedoor.

D. Smoke and Draft Control Door Frames: Tested in accordance with UL 1784 and installed inaccordance with NFPA 105.1. Air Leakage: Maximum 3.0 cfm/sf of door opening with 0.10 inch water gage pressure

differential.

E. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rateddoor frame.1. Attach smoke label to smoke and draft control door frames.

F. Provide a certificate from the manufacturer that steel materials were processed in the UnitedStates.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section withminimum three years documented experience.


A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation.

1.7 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate Work with frame opening construction, door, and hardware installation.

C. Sequence installation to accommodate required door hardware electric wire connections.

[D119-18652]


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

A. Manufacturers:1. Amweld Building Products, Inc.2. Ceco Door Products3. LaForce, Inc.4. Republic Builders Products5. Steelcraft.6. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Standard shop fabricated steel frames, fire rated and non-rated types.1. Frames: To suit ANSI A250.8 Grade and Model of door specified in Section 081314.2. Exterior Frames, Galvanized:

a. Level 3, nominal 16 gage/0.053 inch thick material, base metal thickness.3. Interior Frames:

a. Level 2, nominal 16 gage/0.053 inch thick material, base metal thickness.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink styletamper proof screws.

B. Bituminous Coating: Non-asbestos fibered asphalt emulsion.

C. Primer: ANSI A250.10 rust inhibitive type.

D. Silencers: Resilient rubber fitted into drilled hole.

E. Weatherstripping: Specified in Section 087100.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames for knock down field assembly.

B. Mullions for Double Doors: Removable type, of same profiles as jambs.

C. Transom Bars for Glazed Lights: Fixed type, of same profiles as jamb and head.

D. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guardboxes.

E. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into framehead, flush with top.

F. Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors and mullions ofdouble doors on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors withoutmullions.

[D119-18652]


G. Attach fire rated label to each fire rated frame.

H. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member.

2.4 SHOP FINISHING

A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M.

B. Primer: Baked.

C. Factory Finish: Thermosetting epoxy of color as selected.

D. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to minimum thickness of 1/16 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8.

B. Coordinate with masonry and gypsum board wall construction for anchor placement.

C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 088000.

D. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 087100 anddoors in Section 081314 and 081416.

E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor tostructure and floor.


A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16” measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner.

END OF SECTION 081213.13

[D119-18652]

Standard Steel Doors08 13 14 - 1

SECTION 08 13 14 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes non-rated, fire rated, and thermally insulated steel doors and door louvers.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 08 12 13 - Standard Hollow Metal Frames.2. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.3. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors.4. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting of doors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:1. ANSI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.2. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies

by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.4. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

C. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association:1. HMMA 810 - Hollow Metal Doors.

D. National Fire Protection Association:1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.2. NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and other Opening

Protectives.3. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

E. Steel Door Institute:1. SDI 108 - Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors.

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

[D119-18652]


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut-outs forglazing, louvers, and finishes.

C. Product Data: Submit door configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement.

D. Samples: Submit one sample of door face metal, 2x2 inch in size illustrating shop finish colorsand surface texture.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI A250.8.

B. Fire Rated Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.

C. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated onDrawings.

D. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rateddoor.1. Indicate temperature rise rating for stair doors.2. Attach smoke label to smoke and draft control doors.

E. Surface Burning Characteristics:1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in

accordance with ASTM E84.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section withminimum ten years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three yearsexperience.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, andprotecting products.

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

[D119-18652]


B. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame, and door hardware installation.

C. Coordinate installation to accommodate door hardware electric wire connections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Curries2. Republic Builders Products.3. Steelcraft.4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description:1. Exterior Doors (Insulated): ANSI A250.8, 1-3/4 inch thick.

a. Level 3 – Extra Heavy Duty, Model 1, full flush design.2. Interior Doors (Non-Rated): ANSI A250.8, 1-3/4 inch thick.

a. Level 2 - Heavy Duty, Model 1, full flush design.3. Interior Doors (Fire Rated): ANSI A250.8, 1-3/4 inch thick.

a. Level 2 - Heavy Duty, Model 1, full flush design.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Face: Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI A250.

B. End Closure: Channel, 0.04 inches thick, inverted.

C. Core: polystyrene foam or mineral fiberboard with vertical steel stiffeners.

D. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R-Value of 7, measured in accordance with ASTMC1363.

E. Sound Rated Door: STC of 32, measured in accordance with ASTM E413.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Louvers:1. Material and Finish: Roll formed steel; shop painted finish to color as selected.2. Louver Blade: Inverted Y slat blade, sight proof.

B. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, specifically for double doors.

C. Primer: ANSI A250.10 rust inhibitive type.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.

[D119-18652]


2.5 SHOP FINISHING

A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M.

B. Primer: Baked.

C. Shop Finish: Baked enamel of color as selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions beforestarting work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI A250.8.

B. Install door louvers, plumb and level.

C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08 80 00.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 12 13 andhardware specified in Section 08 71 00.

E. Touch-up damaged shop finishes.



B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for adjusting.

B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION

[D119-18652]

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Flush wood doors.2. Door glazing.3. Door louvers.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 081213 - Standard Hollow Metal Frames.2. Section 087100 - Door Hardware.3. Section 088000 - Glazing.


A. American National Standards Institute:1. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.

B. ASTM International:1. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT

Coated and Uncoated Glass.2. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

C. Architectural Woodwork Institute:1. AWI AWS - Architectural Woodwork Standards.

D. California Department of Health Services:1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions

from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004Addenda.

E. Consumer Products Safety Commission:1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing.

F. Forest Stewardship Council:1. FSC Guidelines - Forest Stewardship Council Guidelines.

G. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association:1. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:1. NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

I. National Fire Protection Association:1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.

[D119-18652]


2. NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and other OpeningProtectives.

3. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

J. National Institute of Justice1. NIH 0108.1 - Ballistic Resistant Protective Materials.

K. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:1. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.2. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

L. Wood Window and Door Manufacturers Association:1. WDMA I.S 1A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors.

1.3 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Submit data for door core materials and construction.2. Submit data for veneer species, type and characteristics.3. Submit data for factory finishes.

C. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special

beveling, special blocking for hardware, and factory machining criteria.2. Indicate cutouts for glazing and louvers.

D. Samples:1. Submit two samples of door veneer, 6x6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color,

and sheen.

E. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit special installation instructions.

F. Qualification Statements:1. Submit manufacturer experience qualifications.


A. Perform Work in accordance with AWI AWS Section 9, Premium Grade.

B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI AWS Section 5 Premium Grade.

[D119-18652]


C. Fire Rated Door Construction: Conform to one of the following:1. NFPA 252; with neutral pressure level at 40 inches maximum above sill at 5 minutes into

test.2. UL 10C.3. 20-Minute Fire Rated and Smoke Barrier Doors: Fire tested without hose stream test.

D. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated onDrawings.

E. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rateddoor.1. Indicate temperature rise rating for stair doors.2. Attach smoke label to smoke and draft control doors.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS




B. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp orwet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tintedsealer when stored more than one week.

C. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.1. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

C. Interior Doors:1. Factory Finished Doors: Furnish manufacturer's life of installation warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Eggers.2. Graham Manufacturing Corp.

[D119-18652]


3. Marshfield Door Systems.4. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.5. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Flush Interior Doors: Solid core.1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches2. Core: PC.3. Face Construction: five ply.4. Performance Duty Level: Heavy duty.5. Quality Grade: Premium.

C. Performance / Design Criteria:1. Performance Duty Level: WDMA I.S. 1A.2. Fire Resistance: As indicated on Drawings.3. Sound Transmission Resistance: ASTM E413; minimum STC 35 for door and frame

assemblies indicated as acoustically rated.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Door Cores: AWI AWS Section 9.1. Solid Core, Non-Fire Rated:

a. Type: PC; particleboard.2. Solid Core, Fire Rated: Category A for positive pressure fire test.

a. Type FD; fire resistive composite.

B. Interior Door Faces:1. Opaque Finished Faces: Close-grain hardwood veneer.2. Transparent Finished Faces: Wood veneer.

a. Species: Red oak.b. Veneer Cut: Rotary cut.c. Veneer Matching: Book matched.d. Face Matching: Running.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI AWS Section 9 requirements.

B. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge,specifically for double doors.

C. Furnish lock blocks at top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.

D. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Wood veneer matching door facing.

E. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

F. Bond edge banding to cores.

[D119-18652]


G. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements anddimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware.

H. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

I. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI AWS Section 9.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Finish work in accordance with AWI AWS Section 5; Premium Grade.

B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.

C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Door Glazing:1. Glass: As specified in Section 088000.2. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink

style tamper proof screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size oralignment.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with AWI AWS Section 9 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Field Fitting and Trimming:1. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.2. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to maximum of 3/4 inch.

a. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire ratingrequirements.

C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 081213 andhardware specified in Section 087100.

[D119-18652]


D. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 088000.

3.3 TOLERANCES


B. Conform to AWI AWS Section 9 requirements for the following:1. Fit and clearance tolerances.2. Gaps.3. Flushness.4. Flatness.5. Squareness.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting andadjusting.

B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

C. Adjust door closer for full closure.


[D119-18652]

Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts08 41 13 - 1

SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum-framed storefronts including aluminum and glass doors and framesincluding hardware, glass, infill panels, and safety and security window film.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 07 27 26 – Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers: Perimeter air seal between

glazing system and adjacent construction.2. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials.3. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Mortised hardware reinforcement requirements affecting

framing members; hardware items other than specified in this section.4. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.5. Section 08 87 16 – Safety and Security Window Film.6. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting of interior surface of infill panel

surfaces.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association:1. AA ADM 1 - Aluminum Design Manual.

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window & Door Manufacturers Association:1. AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2 - Specification for Windows, Doors and Unit Skylights.2. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass

Doors.3. AAMA 503 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Metal Storefronts. Curtain Wall

and Sloped Glazing Systems.4. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.5. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation

Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.6. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.7. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.8. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.9. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site.10. AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall Manual.11. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual.

C. American Society of Civil Engineers:1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

D. ASTM International:

[D119-18652]


1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.2. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products.3. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.4. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.5. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.6. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.7. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through

Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Acrossthe Specimen.

8. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

9. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, CurtainWalls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

10. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential.

11. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration ofInstalled Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic Static AirPressure Difference.

12. ASTM E1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to CyclicPressure Differentials.

13. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, CurtainWalls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.

E. National Fenestration Rating Council Incorporated:1. NFRC 100 - Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors.

F. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:1. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).2. SSPC Paint 25 - Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil, and Alkyd Primer.


A. Aluminum-framed storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections, aluminum and glassentrances, shop fabricated, factory finished, glass and glazing, field applied window film, infill,related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.

B. System Assembly: Site assembled.


A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positiveand negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall, including building corners.1. As calculated in accordance with applicable code, as tested in accordance with ASTM E330.

[D119-18652]


B. Deflection: Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass; with full recovery of glazingmaterials.

C. System Assembly: Accommodate without damage to components or deterioration of seals,movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamicloading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing.

D. Air Infiltration: Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq ft of wall area, measuredat reference differential pressure across assembly of6.24 psf as measured in accordance withASTM E283.

E. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly,primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.

F. Vapor Seal: Limit vapor seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 1 inch sp, 72 degrees F, 40Percent RH without seal failure.

G. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of not less than 45 when measured in accordance withAAMA 1503.

H. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with test pressuredifference of 20 percent of design pressure, with minimum differential of 2.86 lbf/sq ft andmaximum of 12.00 lbf/sq ft.

I. Thermal and Solar Heat Transmittance of Assembly (U Value and SHGC): Comply with ICCIEEC for climate zone in which project is located.

J. Expansion / Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system componentscaused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over 12 hour period without causingdetrimental effect to system components and anchorage.

K. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazingchannels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior by weep drainage network.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,affected related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details.

C. Product Data: Submit component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorageand fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, and internal drainage details.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface.

E. Design Data: Indicate framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensionallimitations.

[D119-18652]


F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics:1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in

accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each foam plasticinsulation board.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimumthree years documented experience.

B. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of Professional Engineerexperienced in design of this Work and licensed at Project location.


A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.


1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION


B. Handle Products of this section in accordance with AAMA MCWM-1 - Curtain Wall Manual#10.

C. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayedcoatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.



B. Do not install sealants nor glazing materials when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees Fduring and 48 hours after installation.

1.11 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate the Work with installation of air barrier and vapor retarder components or materials.

[D119-18652]


1.12 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for glazed units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

A. Manufacturers:1. Kawneer Co., Inc. Series 500 Swing Doors, Trifab VG 451T Frames.2. EFCO Corp., series D5003. Tubelite4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description:1. Aluminum Frame: Thermally broken; applied glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep

drainage system. Frames for interior glazing need not to be thermally broken.2. Mullions: Profile of extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of aluminum or shaped

steel structural section.3. Doors: Aluminum framed glass doors; 1-3/4 inches thick, nominal 5 inch wide top rail and

vertical stiles, nominal10 inch wide bottom rail; square glazing stops.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper typical, 6061 alloy, T6 temper forextruded structural members.

B. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; shaped to suit mullion sections, galvanized.

C. Glass: Specified in Section 08 80 00.

D. Glazing Materials: Storefront manufacturer’s standard types to suit application and to achieveweather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.

E. Window Film: Refer to drawing part 1: A606, Part 2: A603.

F. Hardware: Furnish manufacturer’s standard door hardware for types of doors and applicationsindicated, and as specified below.1. Weather Stripping, Sill Sweep Strips, Thresholds, Hinges, Push/Pull Handles, and Closer:

Manufacturers standard type to suit application.2. Sill Sweep Strips: resilient seal type, of neoprene compound.3. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece for each door opening, non-slip surface.4. Hinges: butt type; top, intermediate, and bottom.

G. Sealant and Backing Materials:

[D119-18652]


1. Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): Manufacturer’s standard materials toachieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.

2. Perimeter Sealant: Specified in Section 07 90 00.

H. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly,yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.

D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.

F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.

2.4 SHOP FINISHING

A. Color Anodized Aluminum Surfaces:1. AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41 non-specular as fabricated mechanical finish, medium matte

chemical finish, and Architectural Class I 0.7 mils2. Dark bronze color.

B. Apply bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious ordissimilar metals.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other Work.

C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive Work of thisSection.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall system in accordance with AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, StoreFront and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.

[D119-18652]


B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances andother irregularities.

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensionaltolerances, aligning with adjacent Work.

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent Work to form water tight dam.

G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor retarder materials.

H. Install integral flashings and integral joint sealers.

I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.

J. Install hardware using templates provided.

K. Coordinate installation of glass with Section 08 80 00 ; separate glass from metal surfaces.

L. Coordinate installation of perimeter sealants with Section 07 90 00.



B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,whichever is less.

C. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, andbalancing.

B. Inspection to monitor quality of installation and glazing.

C. Test to AAMA 501.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting and balancing.

B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.

[D119-18652]


3.6 CLEANING


B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.

C. Wash down surfaces with solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, cleanwiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Protect finished Work from damage.

3.8 SCHEDULES – See drawings.

END OF SECTION

[D119-18652]

ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Extruded aluminum windows.2. Factory glazing.3. Operating hardware.4. Insect screens.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel lintels.2. Section 079000 - Joint Protection: Perimeter sealant and backup materials.3. Section 088000 - Glazing: Exterior and interior glass and plastic glazing materials, for

shop or Site installation.4. Section 088716 – Safety and Security Window Film.


A. A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:1. AAMA 101 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors,

and skylights.2. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Exterior Walls.3. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration

Products.4. AAMA 503 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts,

Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems.5. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.6. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation

Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.7. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.8. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.9. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures

for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.10. AAMA IPCB - Standard Practice for the Installation of Windows and Doors in

Commercial Buildings.11. AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall Manual.

B. American Society of Civil Engineers:1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. ASTM International:1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings

on Iron and Steel Products.

[D119-18652]


2. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron andSteel Hardware.

3. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet andPlate.

4. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy ExtrudedBars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

5. ASTM D3656/D3656M - Standard Specification for Insect Screening and Louver ClothWoven from Vinyl-Coated Glass Yarns.

6. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage throughExterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure DifferencesAcross the Specimen.

7. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of ExteriorWindows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air PressureDifference.

8. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

9. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

10. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration ofInstalled Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or CyclicStatic Air Pressure Difference.

11. ASTM E1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, CurtainWalls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed toCyclic Pressure Differentials.

12. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, CurtainWalls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris inHurricanes.

13. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance ofWindow Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.

D. Consumer Product Safety Commission:1. 16 CFR 1201- Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

E. Glass Association of North America:1. GANA Glazing Manual.

F. National Fenestration Rating Council:1. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors.

G. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:1. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).2. SSPC Paint 25 - Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned

Steel (Type I and Type II).

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer information showing component dimensions, anchorageand fasteners, glass, internal drainage, and typical details.

[D119-18652]


C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected relatedWork, and installation requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate:1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.2. Certify product performance ratings by independent third party such as AAMA,

California Association of Window Manufacturers, or NFRC as meeting or exceedingspecified requirements.

E. Qualifications Statements:1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer.2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer.


A. Perform Work according to following:1. Aluminum Windows: Fabricate window assemblies according to AAMA 101 for types of

windows required.2. Insulated Glass: Fabricate insulated glass units according to GANA Glazing Manual.3. Safety Glass: Comply with CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and applicable codes.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'documented experience, certified by manufacturer.



B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's original packaging; inspect for damage.

C. Store materials according to manufacturer instructions.

D. Protection:1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from

construction operations areas.2. Covering:

a. Protect factory-finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping.b. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to

sunlight or weather.3. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

E. Handling: Comply with AAMA MCWM-1.

[D119-18652]




B. Conditions: Do not install glazing materials when ambient temperature is less than 40 d F.

C. Subsequent Conditions: Maintain minimum temperature of 40 degrees F during and afterinstallation of glazing materials.

1.8 WARRANTY:

A. A.Manufacturer's Warrantees: Submit written warrantees from window manufacturer for thefollowing:1. Windows: Windows furnished are certified as fully warranted against any defects in

material or workmanship under normal use and service for a period of two (2) year fromdate of fabrication.

2. Finish: The pigmented organic finishes on exposed surfaces of windows and componentparts are certified as complying fully with requirements of AAMA 2604 for pigmentedorganic coating and fully warranted against chipping, peeling, cracking or blistering for aperiod of ten (10) years from date of installation.

3. Insulated Glass: Warranted from visual obstruction due to internal moisture for a periodof ten (10) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Manufacturers:1. Tubelite, Inc.2. Graham Architectural Products3. Wausau Window and Wall Systems4. EFCO Corporation5. Substitutions: As specified in Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description:1. Tubelite VW 3700, Thermally-broken aluminum window.

a. ADA compliant for operable windows, using single-lever operation.b. NFPA and IBC compliant for Egress windows.

2. Aluminum window units, sash, glass and glazing, operating hardware, and insect screen.3. Aluminum Windows: Thermally broken with interior portion of frame insulated from

exterior portion with continuous dual glass fiber reinforced 6/6 polyamide nylon struts.4. Glazing: 1” Insulating, Low-E, gray tinted.

C. Window Configuration:1. Comply with AAMA 101 for CW-PG75.2. Sash Designation: Casement, Sash and Frame depth 3 3/8” minimum.

D. Performance and Design Criteria:

[D119-18652]


1. Aluminum Windows: Meet minimum performance criteria for AAMA 101 DesignationCW-PG75 Architectural Window or better.

2. Dead and Live Loads: Positive and negative wind loads acting normal to plane ofwindow as calculated according to applicable code and as tested according to ASTME330/E330M.

3. Wind Load Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass with fullrecovery of glazing materials.

4. Assembly: Accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals,movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel.

5. Vapor Seal: Test glass seal with interior atmospheric static pressure of 1 inch, 140degrees F, and continuous UV and water spray exposure, without seal failure.

6. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazingchannels, and migrating moisture occurring within system to exterior via weep drainagenetwork.

7. Air Infiltration: Limit through assembly to 0.10 cfm/sq. ft. of wall area, measured atreference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf and tested according to ASTME283.

8. Thermal Performance:a. Condensation Resistance Factor Class: Not less than 59 at frame when measured

according to AAMA 1503.b. Thermal Transmittance of Assembly: Maximum U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x

deg. F when measured according to AAMA 1503 with specified glazing.9. Comply with International Code Council's International Energy Conservation Code for

air infiltration and thermal performance for climate zone in which Project is located.10. Water Leakage: None, when measured according to ASTM E331 and E547 with test

pressure difference of 15 pounds per square foot as defined by AAMA 101.11. Vapor Seal: Limit vapor seal with interior atmospheric static pressure of 1 inch, 72

degrees F, and 40 percent relative humidity, without seal failure.12. Forced Entry Resistance: Comply with ASTM F588, Type, Grade 10.13. Life Cycle Test: Per AAMA 101 and AAMA 910, provide proof that the product meets

the criteria including passing air and water tests at the conclusion of the cycle test.14. ADA operation: Window when tested in accordance with AAMA 513 shall meet the

required air, water, structural and operating forces. Opening and closing shall not exceed5 lbs when tested in a neutral pressure differential condition.

15. See Section 088716 for applied security film.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Extruded Aluminum:1. Description: 6063 alloy, T5 temper.2. Comply with ASTM B221.

B. Sheet Aluminum:1. Description: 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper.2. Comply with ASTM B209.

C. Steel Sections: Profiled to suit mullion sections.

D. Insulating Glass:1. Description: Sealed double-pane units as specified in Section 088000 - Glazing.2. Outer Pane: Gray-tinted tempered float glass.

[D119-18652]


3. Inner Pane: Clear Cardinal 270 Low-E tempered float glass.4. Pane Thickness: Minimum 3/16 inch.5. Air Space: Fill with argon gas.6. Minimum Total Unit Thickness: 1 inch.7. Glazing Materials: Manufacturer's standard as specified in Section 088000 – Glazing.8. Glaze units to allow glass replacement without the use of special tools. Sash and frame

shall be dry glazed. Frame and sash shall contain removable EPDM wedge gasket.

E. Hardware:1. Material: Aluminum, stainless steel or other non-corrosive materials compatible with

aluminum for hardware having component parts which are exposed. Cadmium or zinc-plated steel where used must be in accordance with ASTM Specification B 766 or B 633.

2. Single Lever Operator symmetric mechanism with a minimum of two adjustable lockingpoints shall be provided. Operator shall move the vent from the fully closed to the fullyopen position which is limited to 4”. Limit can be disengaged with a Torx T30 bit. Asingle lever handle that does not interfere with the window blinds during operation shallbe provided to operate the hardware. Handle and operator base shall be silver powdercoated finish. Window shall meet AAMA 513-14 for ADA operation.

3. Primary Locking Devices: A single lever handle shall activate hardware assembly withmultiple locking points that engage adjustable keepers.

4. Hinges: Euro hinge; two concealed dual cam adjustable hinges per vent. Hinge shallallow the vent to open 90 degrees after disengaging the Limit & Hold open arm.

5. Limit & Hold Open Hardware: Integral part of operator arm. Fully open 4” limit.

F. Insect Screen Frame:1. Material: Extruded aluminum frame sections finish matching window.2. Corners: Mitered and mechanically joined with a concealed corner key.3. Hardware: Leaf springs and concealed set screws which secure the screen.

G. Insect Screens Mesh:1. Comply with ASTM D3656/D3656M, Class 2.2. Mesh: 18 by 16 fiberglass mesh retained in screen frame with vinyl spline.3. Color: Charcoal.

H. Safety and Security Window Film1. Specified in Section 088716.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter ofassembly while enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive fabricated anchor devices.

D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.

E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware.

F. Furnish internal reinforcement in mullions with galvanized steel members to maintain rigidity.

[D119-18652]


G. Drainage: Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior.

H. Glazing:1. Factory-glaze window units.2. Install glass and infill panels as specified in Section 088000 - Glazing using glazing

method as required to achieve performance criteria.3. Install window film to interior side of exterior glazing with structural attachment system.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Aluminum Surfaces:1. Color Anodized to Dark Bronze finish.

B. Locks, Operators, and Exposed Hardware: Match window finish.

C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces in contact withcementitious or dissimilar materials.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel.

B. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.

C. Frame Extenders: Same material as frame, sized to cover insulation and airspace in cavity wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive Workof this Section.

C. Verify that opening dimensions and clearances are properly sized to receive window units.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerancesand other irregularities.

B. Align window plumb and level, free of warping or twisting.

C. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work.

D. Install sill and sill end angles.

[D119-18652]


E. Thermal Barrier:1. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.2. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of

thermal barrier.

F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials.

G. Perimeter Sealants: As specified in Section 079000 - Joint Protection

H. Install operating hardware.

I. Install window film, field applied, interior side with structural attachment system.1. Dow Corning 995 Structural Sealant

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inch/3 feet noncumulative, or 1/8 inch/10 feet,whichever is less.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting andadjusting.

B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and for secure weathertight closure.

3.5 CLEANING


B. Remove protective material from factory-finished aluminum surfaces.

C. Wash surfaces according to method recommended by and acceptable to sealant and windowmanufacturers; rinse and wipe surfaces clean.

D. Remove excess sealant using moderate amounts of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable tosealant and window manufacturers.


[C59-18281]

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hardware for wood steel and aluminum doors.

1. Provide door gaskets, including weatherstripping and seals, and thresholds.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 081214 - Standard Steel Frames: Silencers integral with steel frames.2. Section 081314 - Standard Steel Doors.3. Section 081416 - Flush Wood Doors.4. Section 083113 - Access Doors and Frames: Door hardware.5. Section 084113 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts: Door hardware by

entrance supplier, except as noted.6. Section 101400 - Signage.7. Section 255000 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls: Building monitoring system.8. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Power supply to

electric hardware devices.9. Section 281600 - Intrusion Detection: Security system.10. Section 283100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Electrical connection to activate door

closers, and release magnetic holders.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges.2. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices.3. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls - Closures.4. ANSI A156.5 - Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products.5. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim.6. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinge Dimensions.7. ANSI A156.8 - Door Controls - Overhead Holders.8. ANSI A156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches.9. ANSI A156.15 - Closer Holder Release Devices.10. ANSI A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware.11. ANSI A156.18 - Materials and Finishes12. ANSI A156 - Complete Set of 24 BHMA Standards (A156 Series) with Binder.

B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association:

1. BHMA Directory of Certified Products.

C. National Fire Protection Association:

[C59-18281]


1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware.3. UL - Building Materials Directory.

E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):

1. WH - Certification Listings.


A. Fire Rated Openings: Provide door hardware listed by UL or Intertek Testing Services(Warnock Hersey Listed), or other testing laboratory approved by applicable authorities.

1. Hardware: Tested in accordance with NFPA 252.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalogcuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, and templates.3. Submit proposed keying schedule

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditionsrequiring special attention.


A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements,and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

C. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardwaresupplier.


A. Perform Work in accordance with the following requirements:

[C59-18281]


1. ANSI A156 series.2. NFPA 80.3. UL 305.

B. Furnish hardware marked and listed in BHMA Directory of Certified Products.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware withminimum three years' documented experience. approved by primary hardware manufacturers.

C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ qualified person to assist in work of this section.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories,Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.


A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.


C. Include persons involved with installation of doors, frames, and hardware.



B. Package hardware items individually with necessary fasteners, instructions, and installationtemplates, when necessary; label and identify each package with door opening code to matchhardware schedule.

1.10 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication ofinternal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items.

1. Provide templates or actual hardware as required to ensure proper preparation of doorsand frames.

C. Sequence installation to accommodate required utility connections.

D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of Work.

[C59-18281]


1.11 WARRANTY

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for locksets and ten year door closers.

1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance materials.

B. Furnish special wrenches and tools applicable for each different and for each special hardwarecomponent.

C. Furnish maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.


A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish ten extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR HARDWARE

A. NOTE: Match manufacturers of existing door hardware throughout addition for the followingcomponents:

B. Hinge

C. Cylinder and Core

D. Lock and Latch Set

E. Exit Device

F. Closers

G. Door Controls and Overhead Holders

H. Push/Pulls, Manual Bolts, Protection Plates and Trim

I. Gaskets, Thresholds, and Trim

[C59-18281]


2.2 COMPONENTS

A. General Hardware Requirements: Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicableANSI A156 standard for type of hardware required. Furnish each type of hardware withaccessories as required for applications indicated and for complete, finished, operational doors.

1. Templates: Furnish templates or physical hardware items to door and framemanufacturers sufficiently in advance to avoid delay in Work.

2. Reinforcing Units: Furnished by door and frame manufacturers; coordinated by hardwaresupplier or hardware manufacturer.

3. Fasteners: Furnish as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required to securehardware.

a. Finish: Match hardware item being fastened.

4. Fire Ratings: Provide hardware with UL or Intertek Testing Services (Warnock HerseyListed) listings for type of application involved.

5. Electrical Devices: Make provisions and coordinate requirements for electrical devicesand connections for hardware.

B. Hinges: ANSI A156.1, full mortise type complying with following general requirements unlessotherwise scheduled.

1. Widths: Sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees.2. Number: Furnish minimum three hinges to 90 inches high, four hinges to 120 inches high

for each door leaf.

a. Fire Rated Doors To 86 inches High: Minimum three hinges.

3. Size and Weight: 4-1/2 inch heavy weight typical for 1-3/4 inch doors.

a. Doors Over 40 inches Wide: Extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing hinges.b. Doors Over 48 inches Wide: 5 inch extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing.

4. Pins: Furnish nonferrous hinges with non-removable pins (NRP) at exterior and lockedoutswinging doors, non-rising pins at interior doors.

5. Tips: Flat button tips with matching plug.

C. Locksets: Furnish locksets compatible with specified cylinders. Typical 2-3/4 inch backset.Furnish standard strikes with extended lips to protect trim from being marred by latch boltverify type of cutouts provided in metal frames.

1. Mortise Locksets: ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Latch Sets: Match locksets. Typical 2-3/4 inch backset. Furnish standard strikes with extendedlips to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt verify type of cutouts provided in metalframes.

1. Mortise Latch Sets: ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 unless otherwise indicated.2. Bored (Cylindrical) Latch Sets: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 unless otherwise

indicated.

[C59-18281]


E. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 rim type, with cross bar, unless otherwise indicated.Furnish standard strikes with extended lips to protect trim from being marred by latch boltverify type of cutouts provided in metal frames, with floor strikes.

1. Types: Suitable for doors requiring exit devices.2. Coordinators: Furnish overhead type at pairs of doors.

F. Cylinders: ANSI A156.5, Grade 1, 6 pin type removable cylinders interchangeable core typecylinders. Match existing building cylinders.

1. Keying: Key to existing keying system.2. Include construction keying.3. Keys: Nickel silver. Stamp keys with "DO NOT DUPLICATE".4. Supply keys in the following minimum quantities:

a. 5 master keys.b. 3 construction keys.c. 3 change keys for each lock biting.

G. Closers: ANSI A156.4 modern type with cover, surface mounted closers; full rack and piniontype with steel spring and non-freezing hydraulic fluid; closers required for fire rated doorsunless otherwise indicated.

1. Adjustability: Furnish controls for regulating closing, latching, speeds, and backchecking.

2. Arms: Type to suit individual condition; parallel-arm closers at reverse bevel doors andwhere doors swing full 180 degrees.

3. Location: Mount closers on inside of exterior doors, room side of interior doors typical;mount on pull side of other doors.

4. Operating Pressure: Maximum operating pressure as follows.

a. Interior Doors: Maximum 5 pounds.b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pound.c. Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire rating, maximum 15 pounds.

H. Door Controls and Overhead Holders: Furnish with accessories as required for completeoperational installation.

1. Manual Door Holders and Overhead Stops: ANSI A156.8, Grade 1 types as specified2. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI A156.15 door mounted closer holder release

devices closers with single point hold open free swinging release device designed tomake swing doors close upon receiving electrical signal.

3. Electro-Magnetic Door Holder: ANSI A156.15 wall mounted type.4. Power Assist Door Operators: ANSI A156.19 power mechanism which reduces opening

resistance of self-closing door.5. Low Energy Power Door Operators: ANSI A156.19 power mechanism which opens and

closes door upon receipt of signal.6. Low Energy Power Open Door Operators: ANSI A156.19 power mechanism which

opens self-closing door; closing of door independent of power operator.

[C59-18281]


I. Push/Pulls, Manual Bolts, Protection Plates, Gaskets, Thresholds, and Trim: Furnish asindicated in Schedule, with accessories as required for complete operational door installations.

1. Push/Pulls: ANSI A156.6; push plates minimum 0.050 inch thick. Furnish as indicated inSchedule, with accessories as required for complete operational door installations.

2. Manual Bolts: ANSI A156.16 Grade 1 top and bottom flush bolts, with dust-proof floorstrike, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Kickplates: ANSI A156.6, metal; height indicated in Schedule by 1 inch less than doorwidth; minimum 0.050 inch thick stainless steel, 10” height.

4. Weatherstripping: Furnish continuous weatherstripping at top and sides of exterior doors.5. Fire Rated Gaskets: Furnish continuous fire rated gaskets at top and sides of fire rated

doors.6. Thresholds: Maximum 1/2 inch height.7. Wall Stops: ANSI A156.1, Grade 1, 2-1/2 inch wall stop concave pad wall stop with no

visible screws.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Lock Trim: Furnish levers with escutcheon plate.

1. Type Tubular, as manufactured by Schlage.

2. Do not permit through bolts on solid wood core doors.

B. Through Bolts: Do not permit through bolts and grommet nuts on door faces in occupied areasunless no alternative is possible.

1. Do not use through bolts on solid wood core doors.

2.4 FINISHING

A. Finishes: ANSI A156.18; furnish following finishes except where otherwise indicated inSchedule at end of section.1. Hinges:

a. BHMA 613 Oil Rubbed Bronze

2. Typical Exterior Exposed and High Use Interior Door Hardware:a. BHMA 613, oil rubbed satin bronze.

3. Typical Interior Door Hardware:a. BHMA 613, oil rubbed satin bronze.

4. Typical Interior Toilet Room Door Hardware:a. BHMA 613, oil rubbed satin bronze.

5. Closers: Finish appearance to match door hardware on same face of door.a. BHMA 613 oil rubbed bronze.

6. Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door hardware on exterior face of door.a. BHMA 613, oil rubbed satin bronze.

[C59-18281]


7. Other Items: Furnish manufacturer's standard finishes to match similar hardware types onsame door, and maintain acceptable finish considering anticipated use and BHMAcategory of finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware and dimensions are as indicated onshop drawings.

C. Verify electric power is available to power operated devices and is of correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate mounting heights with door and frame manufacturers. Use templates provided byhardware item manufacturer.

B. Mounting Heights From Finished Floor to Center Line of Hardware Item: Comply withmanufacturer recommendations and applicable codes where not otherwise indicated.

1. Locksets: 38 inch.2. Push/Pulls: 42 inch.3. Dead Locks: 48 inch.4. Push Pad Type Exit Devices: 42 inch.5. Cross Bar Type Exit Devices: 38 inch.6. Top Hinge: Jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 10 inches from head of

frame to center line of hinge.7. Bottom Hinge: Jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 12-1/2 inches from

floor to center line of hinge.8. Intermediate Hinges: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges and from each

other.9. Hinge Mortise on Door Leaf: 1/4 inch. to 5/16 inch from stop side of door.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.



B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or hardware finish.

[C59-18281]


3.5 SCHEDULES

A. The following hardware sets are intended to establish type and standard of quality when usedtogether with this section’s requirements. Examine Drawings and Specifications and furnishproper hardware for door openings.

Hardware Set 1: Entrance Doors, Hardware by Aluminum entrance supplier3 EA HINGES BB1199 NRP 613 HAG1 EA RIM EXIT DEVICE XP99NL 613 VON1 EA RIM CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 613 SCH1 EA CLOSER 4110 EDA x 18 x 61 695 LCN1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100 613 GLY1 EA SWEEP 200N AL NGP1 EA THRESHOLD 425 AL NGP

WEATHERSTRIPPING

Hardware Set 2: Toilet Room Doors3 EA HINGES BB1279 613 HAG1 EA PRIVACY SET L9040 x 03A 613 SCH1 EA CLOSER 4110 H CUSH 695 LCN1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 613 IVE

Hardware Set 3: Classroom Doors3 EA HINGES BB1279 613 HAG1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND75 613 SCH1 EA WALL STOP WS407 613 IVE1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 613 IVE

Hardware Set 3A: Classroom Doors (Overhead Stop)3 EA HINGES BB1279 613 HAG1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND75 613 SCH1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 613 GLY1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 613 IVE

Hardware Set 4: Storage Room Doors3 EA HINGES BB1279 613 HAG1 EA STOREROOM LOCK LV9080 x 03A 613 SCH1 EA CLOSER 4110 EDA 695 LCN1 EA WALL STOP WS407 613 IVE1 EA KICK PLATE 10” x 2” LDW 613 IVE

Hardware Set 5: Exit Doors3 EA HINGES BB1199 NRP 613 HAG1 EA RIM EXIT DEVICE XP99NL 613 VON1 EA RIM CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 613 BES1 EA CLOSER 4110 EDA x 18 695 LCN1 SET SEALS 160 DKB NGP

Hardware Set 5A: Exit Doors (PAIRS)6 EA HINGES BB1199 NRP 613 HAG

[C59-18281]


1 EA RIM EXIT DEVICE XP99NL 613 VON1 EA RIM EXIT DEVICE XP99DT 613 VON1 EA RIM CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 613 BES2 EA CLOSER 4110 EDA x 18 695 LCN2 SET SEALS 160 DKB NGP2 EA SWEEP 200N DKB NGP2 EA THRESHOLD 425 DKB NGP1 EA RAIN DRIP 16 DKB NGP-KEYED REMOVABLE MULLION BY FRAME MANUFACTURER

Hardware Set 6: Interior Vestibule Doors, by Aluminum Entrance Supplier6 EA HINGES BB1279 613 HAG1 EA CLOSER 4010 x ST1544 695 LCN2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 410 613 GLY1 EA PUSH BAR1 EA PULL BAR

Hardware Set 7: Existing Classroom – Replacement Lever lockset1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND75 613 SCH


[D119-18652]

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116 - 1

SECTION 092116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Metal stud wall framing.2. Metal channel ceiling framing.3. Gypsum board and joint treatment.4. Gypsum sheathing.5. Tile backer board.6. Acoustic insulation.


A. ASTM International:1. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for

Finishing Gypsum Board.2. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board.3. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to

Wood Framing.4. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.5. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.6. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to

Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.7. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.8. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of

Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm)to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness.

9. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases.

10. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse andAxial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.

11. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-ResistantGypsum Backing Panel.

12. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing.13. ASTM C1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior

Substrate Sheets.14. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement

Substrate Sheets.15. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.16. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.17. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

[D119-18652]


18. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction andMaterials.

19. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.

B. American Society of Civil Engineers:1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. California Department of Health Services:1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions


D. Gypsum Association:1. GA 214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.2. GA 216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.3. GA 600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual Sound Control.

E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):1. WH - Certification Listings.

F. National Fire Protection Association:1. NFPA 265 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth

Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls, Method B.2. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth

Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish.

G. South Coast Air Quality Management District:1. SCAQMD Rule 1168-January 7, 2005 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape and acoustic accessories.

C. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate special details associated with acoustic seals.2. Indicate installation details required for seismic design loads.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three yearsdocumented experience.

[D119-18652]


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers, Gypsum Board:1. Certain Teed Gypsum, Inc.2. G-P Gypsum Corp.3. National Gypsum Co.4. United States Gypsum Co.5. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Manufacturers, FRP-laminated Gypsum Board:1. TCH Sales, Inc. (www.tchlaminate.com)2. Citadel Architectural Products (www.citadelap.com), “Enviroguard GYP”3. Pre-approved Equal: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

C. Framing Manufacturers:1. CEMCO2. Custom Stud3. Clark Dietrich4. Substitutions: Section 016000 – Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Framing Materials:1. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; GA-216 and GA-600; galvanized sheet steel, thickness

as required for application2. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ASTM C645. GA-216 and GA-600.3. Fasteners: ASTM C1002 GA-216; length to suit application.4. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and

size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

B. Gypsum Board Materials: ASTM C1396/C1396M; Type X fire resistant where required.1. Standard Gypsum Board: ½ and 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length in place; ends

square cut, tapered and beveled edges.2. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length in place;

ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges. ASTM C1325 for cementitious backer units.3. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: 1/2 inch thick, maximum available length in place;

ends square cut, tapered and beveled square edges.4. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length in place; ends

square cut, tapered and beveled edges.

C. FRP-laminated GWB: Gypsum board laminated with Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.1. 5/8” moisture-resistant gypsum wallboard, laminated with class “C” FRP textured

fiberglass sheets.

D. Tile Backer Boards:1. Fiber Cement Tile Backer Board: ASTM C1288; 1/2 inch thick; mold resistant.2. Tile Backer Board Joint Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.

[D119-18652]


2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced, thicknessrequired for sound rating.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board.

C. Gypsum Board Accessories: ASTM C1047; metal corner beads, edge trim, expansion joints.1. Metal Accessories: Zinc.2. Edge Trim: Type L bead.

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M; GA-216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, and water.

E. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C954 ASTM C1002; length to suit application.1. Screws for Steel Framing: Type S.

F. Accessories for FRP-laminated GWB:1. 2-piece batten strips.2. 8’ vinyl corners

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated onshop drawings.

3.2 DEMOLITION

A. Extend existing gypsum board installations using materials and methods as specified.

B. Repair and remodel existing gypsum board assemblies which remain or are to be altered.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Metal Stud Installation:1. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754.2. Metal Stud Spacing: as indicated.3. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending stud framing through ceiling to

structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoiddeflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners.

4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs.5. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall

cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and openings.

B. Wall Furring Installation:

[D119-18652]


1. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete masonry walls with adjustableattachment for thru-insulation applications.

2. Install thermal insulation in conjunction with Section 072100 between Z-furring channelsdirectly attached to concrete masonry walls.

C. Ceiling Framing Installation:1. Install in accordance with ASTM C754.2. Coordinate location of hangers with other work.3. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.4. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels

or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches pasteach end of openings.

5. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

D. Acoustic Accessories Installation:1. Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing

members.2. Place acoustic insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind

and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to itemspassing through partitions.

3. Install acoustic sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:a. Metal Framing: Two beads.b. Base Layer.c. Face Layer.d. Seal penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, rough-in boxes, and

other penetrations.

E. Gypsum Board Installation:1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840.2. Erect single layer standard gypsum board, with ends and edges occurring over firm

bearing.3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over

firm bearing.4. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing in accordance with ASTM C1280, horizontally, with

edges butted and ends occurring over firm bearing.5. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.6. At acoustical wall: Fasten second layer of gypsum board to first with acoustic adhesive at

manufacturer’s recommended rate of coverage.7. Place second layer perpendicular parallel to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from

joints of first layer.8. Erect exterior gypsum soffit board perpendicular to supports, with staggered end joints

over supports.9. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit

board with sealant.10. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces. Review layout with

Architect prior to placement.11. Place corner beads at external corners at exterior corners. Use longest practical length.

Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials

F. FRP-laminated GWB Installation:1. Install batten retainer over furring or framing per manufacturer’s instructions.2. Install wallboard over receiver and install batten.

[D119-18652]


3. Install edge and corner trim.

G. Joint Treatment:1. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to

receive finishes.2. Feather coats on to adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.3. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board.

3.4 TOLERANCES


B. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.


[D119-18652]

RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 - 1

SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes resilient sheet flooring; resilient tile flooring; resilient base; and resilient stairaccessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 035400 - Cast Underlayment.2. Section 26 05 34 - Execution requirements for electrical floor cover plates for installation

of resilient flooring specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:1. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.2. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing.3. ASTM F1344 - Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile.4. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile.5. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.



C. Federal Specification Unit:1. FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering Vinyl, Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing.2. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant.

D. National Fire Protection Association:1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

E. Scientific Certification Systems:1. SCS EC10.2 - Environmental Certification Program Indoor Air Quality Performance.

F. South Coast Air Quality Management District:1. SCAQMD Rule 1113-January 1, 2004 - Architectural Coatings.2. SCAQMD Rule 1168-January 7, 2005 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


[D119-18652]


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, custom patterns and inlay designs.

C. Product Data: Submit data describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes,patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

D. Samples:1. Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial selection.2. Submit two samples, 4x6 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient

flooring product specified.

E. Warranty information.


A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenancematerials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics:1. Floor Finishes: Class I, minimum 0.45 watts/sq cm when tested in accordance with

NFPA 253.2. Base Material: Class I, minimum 0.45 watts/sq cm when tested in accordance with NFPA

253.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be manufacturer approved for the installation of rubberflooring for the Project.

C. Training for rubber floor installations shall be provided by manufacturer’s technician.

D. Installer shall use manufacturer recommended equipment and installation tools for the rubberfloor installations.

E. Templates shall be required for cutting rubber flooring materials on-site. Template patterns andmaterial must be approved by manufacturer, A/E and Owner prior to starting installation.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five yearsdocumented experience, and trained by manufacturer.1. Individual installer/applicators shall each be trained and/or certified by the manufacturer.2. Crew superintendent and trained installers who begin the project shall remain on the

project through completion. Crew changes are subject to the approval of the Owner andthe Architect.

[D119-18652]




B. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.


A. Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.

C. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation attemperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditionsabove 55 degrees F.


A. Section 013000 – Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.



A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish 24 sq ft of flooring, 1 coil lineal feet of base, of each type and color specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET FLOORING

A. Manufacturers:1. Nora Rubber Flooring Div. Model Noraplan Eco.2. Armstrong3. Mondo4. Mannington.5. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Rubber Sheet Type 1(R-1): 100 percent rubber composition, color and pattern through totalthickness. Interior applications, Norament Eco:1. Total Thickness: 0.08 inch minimum.2. Sheet Width: 48 inch minimum.3. Design: Flat.4. Warranty: 5 year

[D119-18652]


C. Rubber Floor Type 2 (R-2): 100 percent rubber composition, color and pattern through totalthickness. Interior applications, Norament Grano:1. Total Thickness: 0.14 inch +/-.2. Sheet Width: 48 inch minimum.3. Design: Textured.4. Warranty: 5 year

2.2 RESILIENT BASE

A. Manufacturers:1. Nora. Model S1028B2. Armstrong.3. Roppe.4. Johnsonite.5. R.C.Musson Rubber Co.6. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Base: ASTM F1861 (VB) Type TV - Vinyl; coved style1. Height: 4 inch.2. Thickness: 0.11 inch thick.3. Finish: Satin.4. Length: Roll.5. Accessories: Premolded external corners, internal corners, and end stops.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: Cementitious; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer (410).

C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions beforestarting work.

B. Verify concrete floors are dry to maximum moisture content of percent as recommended bymanufacturer, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, and dusting.

C. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances capable of impairing adhesion ofnew adhesive and finish materials.

D. Verify in field all saw cuts and control joints are clean and free from all saw laitance, dirt,debris, coatings, sealers and visible moisture from the saw cuts. Use a suitable dustless concrete

[D119-18652]


saw with a diamond blade slightly wider than the existing cut width with nora patch (or similar)to fill the pre-cleaned saw cuts.

E. Beginning work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and otherdefects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.

B. Use appropriate patching compound or self-leveling underlayment following manufacturer’sinstructions. Patching or underlayment compounds must be moisture, mildew, and alkali-resistant. Provide a minimum of 3000 psi compressive strength.

C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Clean substrate.

E. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or interference with adhesion by substancescannot be removed.

3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Extend existing resilient flooring installations using materials and methods compatible withexisting installations, or as specified.

3.4 INSTALLATION - SHEET FLOORING

A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimumnumber of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patternscarefully at seams.

B. Double cut sheet; provide butt joints.

C. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerlineof door.

D. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and whereindicated. Secure resilient strips by adhesive.

E. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to producetight joints.

F. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.

3.5 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING

A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed.

[D119-18652]


B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.

C. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to producetight joints.

D. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerlineof door.

E. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and whereindicated.

F. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.

3.6 INSTALLATION - BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, usepremolded units.

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

C. Clean, seal, and maintain resilient flooring products.



B. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.


[D119-18652]

TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Carpet tile, fully adhered.2. Accessories.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 096500 Resilient Flooring: Base finish, Termination edging of adjacent floor

finish.


A. ASTM International:1. ASTM D2859 - Standard Specification for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile

Floor Covering Materials.



C. Carpet and Rug Institute:1. CRI Carpet Installation Standard - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet.2. CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program.3. CRI Model Specifications for Commercial Carpets.

D. Consumer Products Safety Commission:1. CPSC 16 CFR 1630 - Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs.

E. National Fire Protection Association:1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

F. South Coast Air Quality Management District:1. SCAQMD Rule 1168-January 7, 2005 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.


A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.


[D119-18652]


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on specified products, describing physical and performancecharacteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

C. Samples:1. Submit sample board of all color options, approximately 3”x3” swags.2. To verify color selection, submit one full-sized carpet tile and one 6”x6” piece for each

carpet color selected, illustrating color and pattern design.3. Submit two 6 inch long samples of each color of edge strip.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring specialattention.


A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenancematerials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenancematerials.

B. Extra Stock Materials:1. Furnish remaining box of carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics:1. Floor Finishes: Comply with one of the following:

a. Class I, minimum 0.45 watts/sq cm when tested in accordance with NFPA 253.b. CPSC 16 CFR 1630 and ASTM D 2859.

B. Texture Appearance Retention Rating: Rating classifications as determined by CRI ModelSpecifications for Commercial Carpets.1. Greater than or equal to 2.5 TARR for Moderate Traffic Level Classification.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS


[D119-18652]


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 yearsdocumented experience.1. FCIB or IFCI certified carpet installers.


A. Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Ambient conditions control facilities forproduct storage and installation.

B. Store materials in area of installation for 48 hours prior to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE

A. Manufacturers:1. Mohawk Industries.2. Mannington.3. J & J.4. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Carpet Tile Type (CPT-1): Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot; conforming to thefollowing criteria: (Basis for design; Mohawk Industries Commercial Carpet, Learn & LiveCollection).1. Pattern: Side Stripe2. Tile Size: 24x24 inch, tile.3. Construction: Color to be determined4. Max. Electrostatic Charge: less than 3kV5. Gage: 1/12 inch.6. Pile Thickness: 0.091”7. Surface Appearance: Level Heathered Loop8. Dye method: Solution Dyed9. Fiber Type: Duracolor Tricor Premium Nylon10. Adhesive: Adhesive11. Installation Method: Quarter Turn12. Flammability: ASTM E648, Class 1 (Glue Down)13. Smoke Density: ASTM E662 Less than 45014. Warranties: Lifetime Limited Carpet Tile Warranty, Lifetime Limited Duracolor Stain

Warranty, Lifetime Static.

B. Carpet Tile Type (CPT-2): Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot; conforming to thefollowing criteria: (Basis for design; Mohawk Industries Commercial Carpet, Learn & LiveCollection).1. Pattern: Side Stripe2. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, Tile3. Construction: Color to be determined.

[D119-18652]


4. Max. Electrostatic Charge: less than 3kV5. Gage: 1/12 inch.6. Pile Thickness: 0.091”7. Surface Appearance: Level Heathered Loop8. Dye method: Solution Dyed9. Fiber Type: Duracolor Tricor Premium Nylon10. Adhesive: Adhesive11. Installation Method: Quarter turn.12. Flammability: ASTM E648, Class 1 (Glue Down)13. Smoke Density: ASTM E662 Less than 45014. Warranties: Lifetime Limited Carpet Tile Warranty, Lifetime Limited Duracolor Stain

Warranty, Lifetime Static.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Vinyl Base: ASTM F1861 (VB) Type TV - Vinyl; coved style:1. Height: 4 inch.2. Thickness: 0.11 inch thick.3. Finish: Satin.4. Length: Roll.5. Accessories: Premolded external corners, internal corners, and end stops.

B. Sub-Floor Filler: Cementitious latex Type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.

C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Vinyl, color, as selected from manufacturer standard.

D. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material Recommended by carpet manufacturerreleasable type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Sections 03 35 00concrete Finishing and Section 03 39 00 Concrete Finishing and are ready to receive work.

3.2 PREPARATION


B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, andother defects with sub-floor filler.

[D119-18652]


C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler iscured.

D. Clean substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION – CARPET TILE

A. Install carpet tile in accordance with CRI Carpet Installation Standard.

B. Do not mix carpet from different cartons unless from same dye lot.

C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.

D. Install carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction alternating to next unit, set parallel toroom length (see Installation Guide).

E. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline and as indicated onInstallation Guide.

F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.

G. Adhere carpet tile adhesive as recommended by manufacturer onto clean and dry substrate.

H. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.

I. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.

3.4 INSTALLATION - BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, usepremolded units.

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.5 CLEANING


B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

C. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.


[D119-18652]

PAINTING AND COATING 099000 - 1

SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and othercoatings.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.2. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Stenciling, color-

coding, and identification banding.3. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Stenciling, color-

coding, and identification banding.4. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Stenciling, color-coding, and

identification banding.5. Section 270553 - Identification for Communications Systems: Stenciling, color-coding,

and identification banding.6. Section 321216 - Pavement markings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to ASTM D16 for definitions of terms used in this Section.


A. ASTM International:1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications.2. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of

Wood and Wood-Base Materials.3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

B. California Department of Public Health:1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions


C. Green Seal:1. GS-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.2. GS-11 - Paints and Coatings.

D. Master Painters Institute:1. MPI - Approved Products List.2. MPI - Architectural Painting Manual.

[D119-18652]


E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.

1.4 SEQUENCING

A. Section 011000 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing.

B. Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is applied.

C. Back prime wood trim before installation of trim.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Submit manufacturer data on finishing products and special coatings.2. Include MPI - Approved Products Lists with proposed products highlighted.

C. Samples:1. Submit two paper chip samples, 4 by 4 inches in size, illustrating range of colors and

textures available for each surface finishing product as scheduled.


A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information on cleaning, touchup, and repair ofpainted and coated surfaces.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenancematerials.

B. Extra Stock Materials:1. Furnish one gallon of each color, type, and surface texture as provided for Project.2. Label each container with manufacturer's label, color, type, texture, room number, and

Site location.3. Store where directed by Owner.


A. MPI Standards:1. Comply with indicated MPI standards.2. Products: Listed in MPI - Approved Products List.

[D119-18652]


B. Surface Burning Characteristics:1. Fire-Retardant Finishes: Maximum 25/450 flame-spread/smoke-developed index when

tested according to ASTM E84.

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum threeyears' documented experience.



B. Container Labeling: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brandcode, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Inspection:1. Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled containers.2. Inspect for damage and to verify acceptability.

D. Store materials in ventilated area and otherwise according to manufacturer instructions.

E. Protection:1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from

construction operations areas.2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.



B. Storage Conditions:1. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 45 degrees F.2. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 90 degrees F

C. Application Conditions:1. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature

ranges required by paint manufacturer.2. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, when relative humidity is outside

humidity ranges, or when moisture content of surfaces exceeds those required by paintmanufacturer.

3. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors and 50degrees F for exteriors, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer instructions.

[D119-18652]


4. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interiors andexteriors, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer instructions.

5. Lighting Level: 80 fc measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.12 WARRANTY


B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for paint and coatings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGS

A. Manufacturers:1. Sherwin Williams2. Benjamin Moore3. Pittsburgh Paint.4. Substitutions: As specified in Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Materials:1. Coatings:

a. Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings.b. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Patching Materials: Latex filler.3. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive Work as recommended byproduct manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of Work, and reportconditions capable of affecting proper application to Architect/Engineer.

D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

E. Moisture Content:1. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter.2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following

maximums:a. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.

[D119-18652]


b. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.c. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured according to ASTM D4442.d. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured according to ASTM D4442.e. Concrete Floors: 8 percent.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for applicationpreparation.

B. Prepare coatings as follows:1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to

homogeneous coating.2. For smooth flow and brushing properties.

C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Defects:1. Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting Work of this Section.2. Remove or repair existing coatings exhibiting surface defects.

E. Marks: Seal marks that may bleed through surface finishes with shellac.

F. Impervious Surfaces:1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium or tri-sodium phosphate and

bleach.2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

G. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish:1. Remove surface contamination by steam or high-pressure water.2. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing.3. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.

H. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish:1. Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials.2. Apply latex-based compatible sealer or primer.

I. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

J. Concrete Floors (new):1. Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water.2. Verify that required acid-alkali balance is achieved.3. Allow to dry.

K. Mosaic Tile Floors and ceramic wall base to receive epoxy coating:1. Tile shall be dull, clean and in sound condition. Patch as required.2. Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors and base with clear water.3. Verify that required acid-alkali balance is achieved.4. Allow to dry.

[D119-18652]


L. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish:1. Remove contamination by steam, high-pressure water, or solvent washing.2. Apply vinyl-etch primer immediately following cleaning.

M. Gypsum Board Surfaces:1. Fill minor defects with filler compound.2. Spot-prime defects after repair.

N. Galvanized Surfaces:1. Remove surface contamination and oils, and wash with solvent.2. Apply coat of etching primer.

O. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish:1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter.2. Remove oil and grease with solution of tri-sodium phosphate, rinse well, allow to dry.3. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium

metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water, and allow to dry.

P. Plaster Surfaces:1. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster.2. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.3. Wash and neutralize high-alkali surfaces.

Q. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces:1. Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust.2. If heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by power tool wire brushing or by

sandblasting.3. Clean by washing with solvent.4. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring that weld joints, bolts, and nuts are

similarly cleaned.5. Spot-prime paint after repairs.

R. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces:1. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.2. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.3. Clean surfaces with solvent.4. Prime bare steel surfaces.

S. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish:1. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming.2. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer.3. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried.4. Sand between coats.

T. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish:1. (Floors) Sand to smooth finish2. Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing.3. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer.4. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried.5. Sand lightly between coats.

[D119-18652]


U. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish:1. Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.2. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections.3. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior paintable calking compound after prime coat has been

applied.

V. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish:1. Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.2. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer.3. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after sealer has been applied.

W. Wood Doors Scheduled for Finish: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces.

X. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Prime metal door at top and bottom edge surfaces.

Y. Existing Work:1. Extend existing paint and coatings installations using materials and methods compatible

with existing installations and as specified.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Comply with MPI - Architectural Painting Manual.

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat, unless specified otherwise.

E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Cleaning:1. Vacuum surfaces to remove loose particles.2. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

G. Fillers:1. If clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood.2. Work fillers into grain before set, and wipe excess from surface.

H. Concealed Surfaces:1. Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.2. Prime concealed surfaces of interior wood surfaces scheduled to receive stain or varnish

finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.

I. Finishing Mechanical and Electrical Equipment:1. Schedule of Color-Coding and Identification Banding of Equipment, Ductwork, Piping,

and Conduit: As specified in Section(s) 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping andEquipment, 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment, 260553 -Identification for Electrical Systems, 270553 - Identification for CommunicationsSystems.

[D119-18652]


2. Paint shop-primed equipment.3. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and

electrical components, and paint separately.4. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed

ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where these items are shop finished.5. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets visible

through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.6. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to

match face panels.7. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment installed in finished areas.8. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment

before installing equipment.9. Color-Coding:

a. Color-code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work according toindicated requirements.

b. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering.10. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings

that were removed prior to finishing.


A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting and testing.

B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,and balancing.

C. Inspecting and Testing: Comply with MPI - Architectural Painting Manual.

3.5 CLEANING


B. Collect waste material that may constitute fire hazards, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from Site.

3.6 ATTACHMENTS

A. Schedule - Exterior Surfaces:1. Steel - Galvanized:

a. One coat galvanize primer Sherwin Williams ProCryl Primer.b. Two coats of latex enamel, semigloss.c. ProCryl Top Coat, as manufactured by Sherwin Williams.

B. Schedule - Interior Surfaces:1. Wood - Painted:

a. One coat of latex prime sealer, Wall and Wood Primer.b. Two coats of latex enamel, satin, S-W ProClassic.

2. Wood - Transparent:

[D119-18652]


a. Filler coat (for open grained wood only) Min Wax wood conditioner.b. One coat of stain. S-W Wood Classics Oil Stain, A49 Series, Minwax or BAC

wiping stain.c. Two coats of water based polyurethane with satin finish: S-W A64 Series Wood

Classics or Kem Aqua Lacquer T75-F527.3. Wood Flooring – Refinish Existing wood flooring with Transparent:

a. Sand to smooth, clean finish, free of any foreign material.b. Filler coat (for open grained wood only) Min Wax wood conditioner.c. Three coats Minwax water-based Polyurethane for floors with satin finish.

4. Concrete, existing Concrete Block exposed to viewa. Existing paint is alkyd base.b. Prime: one coat prime with ProBlock Seals & Bonds B51 W20.c. Paint: two coats ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel B20-2600 Series

(4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat).5. Concrete, new concrete Block exposed to view, Latex system (PNT-4):

a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex interior/exterior; S-W PrepRite Block FillerB25W25.

b. Paint: two coats ProMar 200 Latex Semi-Gloss, B31W2200. (4 mils wet, 1.4 milsdry per coat).

6. Steel – Unprimed:a. One coat of latex primer, S-W ProCryl.b. Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss SherCryl. (4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per).

7. Steel - Primed:a. Touch-up with latex primer.b. Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss. (4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat).c. S_W ProMar 200 Latex Semi-Gloss, B31W2200.

8. Steel – Primed, Exposed Structure and Deck:a. One coat water based flat Dryfall B42W, Gray.

9. Seamless Epoxy Floor (“EP” on Room Finish Schedule):a. First Coat: General Polymers GP 3579 Primer 3-5 mils.b. Second Coat: General Polymers GP 3579 Epoxy 10-12 mils.c. Add colored quartz.d. Third Coat: General Polymers GP3744 Clear 10-12 mils

10. Gypsum Board and Plaster Walls:a. One coat of latex primer sealer. S-W Latex Primer B28WF162.b. Two coats of latex enamel, eggshell.c. S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shell.

11. Gypsum Board in Bathrooms, Locker Rooms, Kitchen, and Janitor Rooms (PNT-2):a. One coat of latex primer sealer. S-W Contractor Latex Primer B28WF162.b. Two coats of latex enamel, semi-gloss, Industrial PreCat SemiGloss K46W151 (4

mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat).12. Gypsum Board and Plaster Ceilings (PNT-3):

a. One coat of latex primer sealer. S-W ProMar 200 Latex Primer.b. Two coats of latex enamel, flat finish, S-W ProMar 200, extra white, flat (4 mils

wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat).


[D119-18652]

Entrance Floor Mats and Frames12 48 13 - 1

SECTION 12 48 13

ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes carpet mat; rubber mat; and recessed frame.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Floor depression formed with frame.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of grates and frames not less than half-scale sections oftypical installations, details of patterns or designs, anchors, and accessories, and fieldmeasurements of slab recess to receive frames grates

C. Product Data: Manufacturers product specifications, installation and maintenance instructions.

D. Samples for Selection Purposes: Actual sections of grate and frame material in a convenient butrepresentative size showing full range of colors, textures, finishes and patterns available for eachtype of floor grate and frame specified.

E. Installation, Operations and Maintenance data.


A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawing.


A. Installation, Operations and Maintenance data.

B. Rolling Load: 350 pounds per wheel.

C. Uniform Load: 300 lbs per square foot.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR MATS

A. Manufacturers:1. Babcock-Davis.2. C/S Group Model PediGrid G1.3. Pawling Model RG-400.

[D119-18652]


4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Carpet Mat: pile permanently bonded to vinyl backing; inch wide x length of tread, color asselected.1. Premium Carpet polypropylene fibers, scrubber-like texture.

B. Recessed Frame: anodized aluminum, 1 3/4 inch deep, with anchoring features.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Entrance System Floor Grate1. Rail: Aluminum Rail: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T6

2. Rail Finish: mill finish.

3. Rail Spacing: Spaced 2" (50.8MM) on center

4. Fasteners: Non-corrosive screws and anchors for securing frames together and to floors.

5. Construction: Flexible low-density polyethylene hinge retained in a captive aluminum tread

port. Tread cushions spaced 24" (610 mm) o.c.

6. Rolling Load: 350-pounds per wheel.

7. Uniform Load: 300 lbs per square foot

8. Tread Inserts

i. MatDesign™ Roll up Mat with RuggedScrub carpet tread: Crimped solution-dyed

600 denier polypropylene fibers tufted into a woven double backing and

mechanically secured to tread rails. Color selected from manufacturer’s standard.

ii. GrateDesign Rigid Grate

B. Entrance System Floor Grate Frame

1. Aluminum Frame: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T52. Frame Finish: mill (standard)

3. Mounting:

i. LBC, Level Bed, cast-in place frame: 1 3/8” deep with 1/2" exposed surface.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Products must be placed on a flat and level substrate. Substrate shall meet tolerance of 1/8" over10 feet in accordance with ACI 302.

B. Examine the substrates and conditions under which the work is to be performed, and notify theContractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify size of floor recess before fabricating mats.

[D119-18652]


B. Vacuum clean floor recess.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Examine the substrates and conditions under which the work is to be performed, and notify theContractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Coordinate top of product surfaces with swinging doors to provide under-door clearance.1. Provide necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages fro proper location and secure attachment

of frames to concrete.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES


B. Maximum Gap Formed at Recessed Frame From Mat Size: 1/4 inch.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust floor mats and frames to prevent tripping hazard.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Upon completion of frame installations, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard ingrate recesses, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection untilconstruction traffic has ended and Project is near time of Substantial Completion.

B. Install product when no further wheeled construction traffic will occur and wet type operationsincluding painting and decorating are complete.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Electric Traction Elevators14 21 00 - 1

SECTION 14 21 00 – ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies electric traction elevators.

B. Work Required:

1. The work required under this section consists of all labor, materials and servicesrequired for the complete installation of all the equipment required for the elevator asherein specified.

2. All work shall be performed per State of Michigan Codes.

3. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in thesingular, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many of such devices orparts as are required to make complete installation.

C. Related work not specified herein: The following sections contain requirements thatrelate to this section and are performed by trades other than the elevatormanufacturer/installer.

1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: elevator pit, and elevator machinefoundation.

2. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: masonry hoistway enclosure, building-in andgrouting hoistway doorframes, and grouting of sills.

3. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: pit ladder, divider beams, and supports forentrances, rails and hoisting beam at top of elevator hoistway.

4. Section 07 16 00 - Cementitious Waterproofing: waterproofing of elevator pit.5. Section 23 50 00 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: ventilation and

temperature control of elevator equipment areas.6. Section 26 00 00 - Electrical:

a. Main disconnects for each elevator.b. Electrical power for elevator installation and testing.c. Disconnecting device to elevator equipment prior to activation of sprinkler

system.d. The installation of dedicated GFCI receptacles in the pit and overhead.e. Lighting in controller area, machine area and pit.f. Wiring for telephone service to controller.g. Fire Alarm Systems: The installation of fire and smoke detectors at requiredlocations and interconnecting devices; fire alarm signal lines to contacts in themachine area.h. Telephone Systems: ADAAG-required emergency communications equipment.

D. Applicable Codes: Comply with applicable building and elevator codes at the project site,including but not limited to the following:

1. ANSI A117.1, Buildings and Facilities, Providing Accessibility and Usability forPhysically Handicapped People.

[H11-00395]


2. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.3. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.4. ANSI/NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows.5. ASME/ANSI A17.7, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.6. ANSI/UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.7. CAN/CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code.8. CAN/CSA-B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.9. EN 12016 (May 1998): “EMC Product Family Standards for lifts, escalators, and

passenger conveyors Part 2 – immunity”10. Local Building Codes11. All other local applicable codes.


A. Equipment Description: Gen2® gearless machine-room less elevator where all

components fit inside the hoistway or approved equal.

B. Equipment Control: Elevonic® Control System.

C. Drive: Regenerative

D. Quantity of Elevators: 1

E. Elevator Stop Designations: 1,2,3,4,5,6,7

F. Stops : 7

G. Openings: 7 at Front, 0 at Rear.

H. Travel: 8 ft 6 in floor-to-floor, 51’-0” total

I. Rated Capacity: 5000H lbs

J. Rated Speed: 150 fpm

K. Platform Size: 6’ 0-1/2” wide x 9’ 1-1/4” deep

L. Clear Inside Dimensions: 6' 0 1/2" x 8' 4 3/4"

M. Cab Height: 7' 9"

N. Clear Cab Height: 7’-9” with 5/16” floor recess and Structural ceiling

O. Entrance Type and Width: Two Speed; 4' 6"

P. Entrance Height: 7' 0"

Q. Main Power Supply: 208 Volts + or - 5% of normal, three-Phase, with a separate

equipment grounding conductor.

R. Car Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, Single-phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz.

S. Machine Location: Inside the hoistway at the top of the hoistway.

T. Signal Fixtures: Manufacturer’s standard with metal button targets (exc. CA).

U. Controller Location: Machine-Roomless Controller(s) shall be located at the front

opening of the top terminal landing in entrance frame.

[H11-00395]


V. Performance:

1. Car Speed: + 3 % of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of

travel.

2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 120% of rated load. (code required).

3. Ride Quality:

a. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 20 milli-gb. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 12 milli-gc. Vertical Jerk (maximum): 4.59 ± 1.0 ft./ sec3 (1.4 ± 0.3 m/ sec3)d. Acceleration/Deceleration (maximum): 2.62 ft./ sec2 (0.8 m/ sec2)e. In Car Noise: 55 – 60 dB(A)f. Stopping Accuracy: ± 0.375 in. (± 10 mm) max, ± 0.25 in. (± 6 mm) Typicalg. Re-leveling Distance: ± 0.5 in. (± 12 mm)

W. Operation: Simplex Collective Operation- Using a microprocessor-based controller,operation shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in thesystem have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served.

X. Operating Features – Standard1. Full Collective Operation2. Anti-nuisance.3. Fan and Light Protection.4. Load Weighing Bypass.5. Independent Service.6. Full Collective Operation.7. Firefighters' Service Phase I and Phase II8. Top of Car Inspection.

Y. Door Control Features:1. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to

a normal hall or car call.2. Elevator doors shall be provided with a reopening device that will stop and reopen

the car door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically should the door(s) becomeobstructed by an object or person.Door protection shall consist of a two dimensional, multi-beam array projectingacross the car door opening.

3. Door nudging operation to occur if doors are prevented from closing for an adjustableperiod of time.

Z. Provide equipment according to seismic zone: Zone 0

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each system proposed for use.Include the following:1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators.2. Cab design, dimensions and layout.3. Hoistway-door and frame details.4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

[H11-00395]


5. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in hoistway (BTU).6. Color selection chart for Cab and Entrances.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit approval layout drawings. Include the following:1. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway.2. Maximum rail bracket spacing.3. Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structure.4. Clearances and travel of car.5. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions.6. Location and sizes of access doors, hoistway entrances and frames.

C. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturer's standard operations andmaintenance manual.


A. Manufacturer: Elevator manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.

B. Installer: Elevators shall be installed by the manufacturer.

C. Permits, Inspections and Certificates: The Elevator Contractor shall obtain and pay fornecessary Municipal or State Inspection and permit as required by the elevator inspectionauthority, and make such tests as are called for by the regulations or such authorities.These tests shall be made in the presence of such authorities or their authorizedrepresentatives.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at theagreed upon date, the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper andsuitable storage area on or off the premises.

Should the storage area be off-site and the equipment not yet delivered, then the elevatorcontractor, upon notification from the General Contractor, will divert the elevatorequipment to the storage area. If the equipment has already been delivered to the site,then the General Contractor shall transport the elevator equipment to the storage area.The cost of elevator equipment taken to storage by either party, storage, and redeliver tothe job site shall not be at the expense of the elevator contractor.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. The elevator contractor’s acceptance is conditional on the understanding that theirwarranty covers defective material and workmanship. The warranty period shall notextend longer than one (1) year from the date of completion or acceptance thereof bybeneficial use, whichever is earlier, of each elevator. The warranty excludes: ordinarywear and tear, improper use, vandalism, abuse, misuse, or neglect or any other causesbeyond the control of the elevator contractor and this express warranty is in lieu of allother warranties, express or implied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitnessfor a particular purpose.

1.07 MAINTENANCE and SERVICE

[H11-00395]


A. Maintenance service consisting of regular examinations and adjustments of the elevatorequipment shall be provided by the elevator contractor for a period of 12 Months monthsafter the elevator has been turned over for the customer’s use. This service shall not besubcontracted but shall be performed by the elevator contractor. All work shall beperformed by competent employees during regular working hours of regular workingdays. This service shall cover adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to tocorrect any operational malfunctions or improper operation or travel. Only genuine partsand supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of the original equipment shall beprovided.

B. A 12 month warranty period shall cover all periodic lubrication of elevator componentsshall including: Sheaves, Rails, Belts, Ropes, Car and CWT guides, etc

C. The elevator control system must:

1) Provide in the controller the necessary devices to run the elevator on inspectionoperation.2) Provide on top of the car the necessary devices to run the elevator in inspectionoperation.3) Provide in the controller an emergency stop switch. This emergency stop switch whenopened disconnects power from the brake and prevents the motor from running.4) Provide in the event of a power outage, means from the controller to electrically liftand control the elevator brake to safely bring the elevator to the nearest available landing.5) Provide the means from the controller to reset the governor over speed switch and alsotrip the governor.6) Provide the means from the controller to reset the emergency brake when set becauseof an unintended car movement or ascending car over speed.

D. Provide system capabilities to enable a remote expert to create a live, interactiveconnection with the elevator system to enable the following functions:

1. Remotely diagnose elevator issues with a remote team of experts

2. Remotely return an elevator to service

3. Provide real-time status updates via email

4. Remotely make changes to selected elevator functions including:

a. Control building traffic: Restrict floor access, remove car from group

operation, shut down elevator, select up peak/down peak mode, activate

independent service

b. Conserve energy: Activate cab light energy save mode, activate fan

energy save mode, shut down car(s)

c. Improve passenger experience: Extend door open times, change parking

floor, activate auto car full, activate anti-nuisance, advance door opening,

door nudging, extend specific floor extended opening time, release

trapped passengers.

[H11-00395]


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Provide machine-roomless Gen2™ traction passenger elevators from Otis ElevatorCompany or Approved Equal.

B. The control system and car design based on materials and the systema shall consist of thefollowing components:

1. Controller located entirely inside the hoistway.2. An AC gearless machine using embedded permanent magnets mounted at the top ofthe hoistway.3. Polyurethane Coated-Steel Belts for elevator hoisting purposes.4. Regenerative drive that captures normally wasted energy and feeds clean power backinto the building’s power grid.5. LED lighting standard in ceiling lights and elevator fixtures.6. Sleep mode operation for LED ceiling lights and car fan.

C. Approved Installer:1. Installer must be Licensed in State of Michigan in accordance with State laws.

2.02 EQUIPMENT: CONTROLLER COMPONENTS

A. Controller: A microcomputer based control system shall be provided to perform all of thefunctions of safe elevator operation. The system shall also perform car and groupoperational control.

1. All high voltage (110V or above) contact points inside the controller shall be protectedfrom accidental contact when the controller doors are open.2. Controller shall be separated into two distinct halves; Motor Drive side and Controlside. High voltage motor power conductors shall be routed so as to be physicallysegregated from the rest of the controller.3. Field conductor terminations points shall be segregated; high voltage (>30 volts DCand 110 VAC,) and low voltage (< 30 volts DC)4. Controllers shall be designed and tested for Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)immunity according to the EN 12016 (May 1998): “EMC Product Family Standards forlifts, escalators, and passenger conveyors Part 2 – immunity”5. Controller shall be located inside the wall next to the top landing entrance frame.Emergency access shall be provided through an access panel in the entrance framesecured by a key lock.6. A separate control room or cabinet should not be required.

B. Drive: A Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC drive system shall be provided. Thedrive shall be set up for regeneration of AC power back to the building grid.

2.03 EQUIPMENT: MACHINE AND GOVERNOR

A. Machine: AC gearless machine, with a synchronous permanent-magnet motor, dualsolenoid service and emergency disc brakes, mounted at the top of the hoistway.

B. Governor: The governor shall be a tension type car-mounted governor.

[H11-00395]


C. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Polyurethane type buffers shall be used.

D. Hoistway Operating Devices:1. Emergency stop switch in the pit2. Terminal stopping switches.

E. Positioning System: Consists of an encoder, reader box, and door zone vanes.

F. Guide Rails and Attachments: Guide rails shall be Tee-section steel rails with bracketsand fasteners. Side counterweight arrangements shall have a dual-purpose bracket thatcombines both counterweight guide rails, and one of the car guide rails to buildingfastening.

G. Coated-Steel Belts: Polyurethane coated belts with high-tensile-grade, zinc-plated steelcords and a flat profile on the running surface and the backside of the belt. All drivingsheaves and deflector sheaves should have a crowned profile to ensure center tracking ofthe belts. A continuous 24/7 monitoring system using resistance based technology has tobe installed to continuously monitor the integrity of the coated steel belts and provideadvanced notice of belt wear.

H. Governor Rope: Governor rope shall be steel and shall consist of at least eight strandswound about a sisal core center.

I. Fascia: Galvanized sheet steel shall be provided at the front of the hoistway.

J. Hoistway Entrances:

1. Frames: Entrance frames shall be of bolted construction for complete one-piece unitassembly. All frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in thehoistway and shall be of UL fire rated steel.

2. Sills shall be extruded Aluminum.

3. Doors: Entrance doors shall be of metal construction with vertical channelreinforcements.

4. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire rated for 1-1/2 hour (for M1, M2,M3, D1, and D2 Entrance Arrangements or 1 hour for D3 EntranceArrangement.

5. Entrance Finish: Powder painted. Color to be selected from the manufacturer'sstandard color chart.

6. Entrance marking plates: Entrance jambs shall be marked with 4” x 4” (102 mm x102 mm) plates having raised floor markings with Braille located adjacent to thefloor marking. Marking plates shall be provided on both sides of the entrance.

7. Sight Guards: Black sight guards will be furnished with all doors.

2.04 EQUIPMENT: CAR COMPONENTS

[H11-00395]


A. Car frame and Safety: A car frame fabricated from formed or structural steel membersshall be provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosures. Thecar safety shall be integral to the car frame and shall be Type "B", flexible guide clamptype.

B. Cab: Steel shell cab with satin stainless steel vertical panels. Brushed stainless steelfinished vertical trim pieces optional. Brushed Steel Finish finished base platelocated at top and bottom.

C. Car Front Finish: Satin Stainless Steel

D. Car Door Finish: Satin Stainless Steel

E. Ceiling Type: Flush steel ceiling with 4 LED lights in a real white (EW0) finish.

F. Emergency Car Lighting: An emergency power unit employing a 6-volt sealedrechargeable battery and totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevatorcar in the event of building power failure.

G. Fan: A one-speed 120 VAC fan will be mounted to the ceiling to facilitate in-car aircirculation, meeting A17.1 code requirements. The fan shall be rubber mounted toprevent the transmission of structural vibration and will include a baffle to diffuse audiblenoise. A switch shall be provided in the car-operating panel to control the fan.

H. Handrail: Handrails shall be 3/8” x 2” (9.5 mm x 51 mm) flat tubular handrail with abrushed steel finish.Handrails shall be provided on the sides and rear of the car enclosure.

I. Threshold: Extruded Aluminum

J. Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit.

K. Guides: The car shall have 3” diameter roller guides at top and bottom and thecounterweight shall have slide type guides at the top and the bottom.

L. Platform: The car platform shall be constructed of metal. Load weighing device shall bemounted on the belts at the top of the hoistway.

M. Certificate frame: Provide a Certificate frame with a satin stainless steel finish.

N. The LED ceiling lights and the fan should automatically shut off when the system is notin use and be powered back up after a passenger calls the elevator and pushes a hallbutton.

2.05 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES

A. Car Operating Panel: A standard car operating panel shall be provided which contains allpush buttons, key switches, and message indicators for elevator operation. The caroperating panel shall have a Satin Stainless Steel finish.

[H11-00395]


A car operating panel shall be furnished. It shall contain a bank of round stainless steel,mechanical LED illuminated buttons. Flush mounted to the panel and marked tocorrespond to the landings served. All buttons to have raised numerals and Braillemarkings with:

Vandal resistant, 1/8” (3mm) satin stainless steel projecting button with blue LEDilluminating center jewel.

The car operating panel shall be equipped with the following features:

1. Raised markings and Braille to the left hand side of each push-button.2. Car Position Indicator at the top of and integral to the car operating panel.3. Door open and door close buttons.4. Inspection key-switch.5. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number.6. Help Button: The help button shall initiate two-way communication between the carand a location inside the building, switching over to another location if the call isunanswered, where personnel are available who can take the appropriate action. Visualindicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement.7. Landing Passing Signal: A chime bell shall sound in the car to signal that the car iseither stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator.8. In car stop switch (toggle or key unless local code prohibits use)9. Firefighter’s hat10. Firefighter’s Phase II Key-switch11. Call Cancel Button

B. Car Position Indicator: A digital, LED car position indicator shall be integral to the caroperating panel.

C. Hall Fixtures: Hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and keyswitches for elevator operation. Integral Hall fixtures shall feature round stainless steel,mechanical buttons marked to correspond to the landings. Hall fixtures to be located inthe entrance jamb. Therefore, separate wiring and installation of electrical boxes insidethe wall for the hall buttons are not required. Buttons shall be in vertically mountedfixture. Fixture shall be Satin Stainless Steel.

D. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be providedin the car entrance. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shallindicate the direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and otherconditions under which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work untilunsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

[H11-00395]


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of all elevator components except as specifically provided for elsewhere byothers.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION

A. The elevator contractor shall make a final check of each elevator operation with theOwner or Owner’s representative present prior to turning each elevator over for use. Theelevator contractor shall determine that control systems and operating devices arefunctioning properly.

[H11-00359]

Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment22 05 29 - 1

SECTION 22 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Pipe hangers and supports.2. Hanger rods.3. Flashing.4. Sleeves.5. Mechanical sleeve seals.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, andpipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers.

C. Product Data:1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.


A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority for welding hanger and supportattachments to building structure.

B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standard.



B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing inoriginal packaging.

[H11-00359]



A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.6 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers:1. Globe Pipe Hanger Products Inc.2. Michigan Hanger Co.3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Plumbing Piping - DWV:1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook.5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp.6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete

pier or steel support.8. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook.6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel

clamp.7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.8. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,

and concrete pier or steel support.9. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock

nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.10. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.

[H11-00359]


2.3 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet compatible with roofing.

D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Sealant: Acrylic.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

1. Link Seal2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber linksshaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts andpressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertightseal and electrical insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions beforestarting work.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.

B. Do not drill or cut structural members.

3.3 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

[H11-00359]


B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforcedconcrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches andlarger.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing betweenhangers.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapezehangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

K. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation.Refer to Section 22 07 00.

3.5 INSTALLATION - FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather orwaterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with leadworked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheetsize. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash,and seal.

C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sideswith minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.

D. Seal floor drains, shower drains, and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials.

[H11-00359]


E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roofjacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide forcontinuous insulation wrapping.

D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finishedWork.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

3.8 SCHEDULES

PIPE HANGER SPACINGPIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM

HANGER SPACINGFeet

HANGER RODDIAMETERInches

ABS (All sizes) 4 3/8Aluminum (All sizes) 10 1/2BrassCast Iron (All Sizes) 5 5/8Cast Iron (All Sizes) with 10 foot length of pipe 10 5/8CPVC, 1 inch and smaller 3 1/2

CPVC, 1-1/4 inches and larger 4 1/2

Copper Tube, 1-1/4 inches and smaller 6 1/2Copper Tube, 1-1/2 inches and larger 10 1/2Fiberglass 4 1/2Glass 8 1/2Polybutylene 2.67 3/8Polypropylene 4 3/8PVC (All Sizes) 4 3/8

[H11-00359]


Steel, 3 inches and smaller 12 1/2Steel, 4 inches and larger 12 5/8

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment22 05 53 - 1

SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Stencils.2. Pipe markers.3. Labels.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by

this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanicalidentification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, andvalve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, andinstallation.




B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.


A. Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping systemsand accessories.

[H11-00359]


B. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section withminimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three yearsexperience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags:1. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background

color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter.

B. Metal Tags:1. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished edges.

C. Information Tags:1. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-

5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location.

2.2 STENCILS

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters.2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch high letters.3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters.4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering sizeconforming to ASME A13.1.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers:1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering.

Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:1. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

[H11-00359]


D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:1. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil

thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

2.4 LABELS

A. Description: Aluminum or Laminated Mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed withprinted identification.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. Forunfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buriedpipe.

E. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inchdiameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and alignwith axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risersand drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,and at each obstruction.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Facility Sanitary Sewerage22 13 00 - 1

SECTION 22 13 00

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sanitary sewer piping buried within 5 feet of building.2. Sanitary sewer piping above grade.3. Floor drains.4. Floor sinks.5. Cleanouts.6. Interceptors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:1. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers

catalog information.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors.Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



[H11-00359]




B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sectionsof the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.



B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material, bell and spigot solvent sealed ends.1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2729.2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.1. Fittings: ASTM D2729, PVC.2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.1. Fittings: ASTM D2665, PVC.2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Manufacturers:1. MIFAB.2. Zurn Industries, LLC3. Watts4. J.R. Smith5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.4 FLOOR SINKS

A. Manufacturers:1. MIFAB.

[H11-00359]


2. Zurn Industries, LLC3. Watts4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Manufacturers:1. MIFAB.2. Zurn Industries, LLC3. Watts4. J.R. Smith5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.

C. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clampingcollar, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and rounddepressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.

D. Interior Finished Wall Areas : Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coatedcover with gasket, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.

E. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts onvertical rainwater leaders.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated onDrawings.

[H11-00359]


B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 4 ft of cover.

C. Establish minimum separation from other services in accordance with current Michigan Plumbingcode.

D. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.

E. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 23 16.

F. Install pipe on prepared bedding.

G. Route pipe in straight line.

H. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe. buried 6 inches below finish grade, abovepipe line; coordinate with Section 31 23 23.

3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixtureof graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

F. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

G. Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space.

H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connectedequipment. Refer to Section 21 05 16.

J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation.Refer to Section 22 07 00.

K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible.

L. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, andapply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

N. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.Refer to Section 09 90 00.

[H11-00359]


O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

P. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

Q. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetratingsleeves and piping.

R. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.


A. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with applicable code.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment23 05 29 - 1

SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Pipe hangers and supports.2. Hanger rods.3. Inserts.4. Flashing.5. Sleeves.6. Mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and

supports specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:1. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including critical dimensions, sizes, andpipe hanger and support locations and detail of trapeze hangers.

C. Product Data:1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.Indicate calculations used to determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and risersupport hangers.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.


G. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

[H11-00359]


1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section withminimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 yearsexperience.



B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing inoriginal packaging.



1.8 WARRANTY


B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and supports.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers:1. ERICO International Corporation.2. Hilti, Inc.3. NIBCO INC.4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Hydronic Piping:1. Conform to ASME B31.9.2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with

welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

[H11-00359]


9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,and concrete pier or steel support.

10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

11. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon steel ring.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.

2.3 INSERTS

A. Manufacturers:1. ERICO International Corporation.2. Hilti, Inc.3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connectionwith lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts tosuit threaded hanger rods.

2.4 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.

D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.

E. Sealant: Acrylic.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers:1. Linkseal-EnPro Industries.2. Metraflex Company.

[H11-00359]


3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber linksshaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts andpressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertightseal and electrical insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforcedconcrete beams.



E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt withrecessed square steel plate and nut above slab.


A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.1.

B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor.

G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapezehangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces,pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

[H11-00359]


L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation.Refer to Section 22 07 00.

3.3 INSTALLATION - FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrateweather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms for soundcontrol.

C. Provide curbs for roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash andcounter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach Counterflashing to equipment and lap baseflashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.

D. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roofjacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

3.4 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide forcontinuous insulation wrapping.

D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finishedWork.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing: per applicable code.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment23 05 53 - 1

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Nameplates.2. Tags.3. Stencils.4. Ceiling tacks.5. Labels.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by

this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanicalidentification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, andvalve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Samples: Submit two tags, labels, pipe markers used on project.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, andinstallation.




B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.

[H11-00359]


1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers; Name Plates:1. Seton Identification Products2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on lightcontrasting background color.

2.2 TAGS

A. Manufacturers; Plastic Tags:1. Seton Identification Products2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.3. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background

color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter.

B. Manufacturers; Metal Tags:1. Seton Identification Products2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.3. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished edges.

C. Manufacturers; Information Tags:1. Seton Identification Products2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.3. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-

5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Manufacturers; Pipe Marker:1. Seton Identification Products2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

[H11-00359]


3. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering.Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

C. Manufacturers; Plastic Tape Pipe Marker:1. Seton Identification Products2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.3. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

2.4 CEILING TACKS

A. Manufacturers; Ceiling Tacks:1. Seton Identification Products2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.

C. Color code as follows:1. HVAC equipment: Yellow.2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red.3. Plumbing valves: Green.4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. Forunfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.

F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

G. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

[H11-00359]


H. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inchdiameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and alignwith axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risersand drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,and at each obstruction.

I. For exposed natural gas lines other than steel pipe, attach yellow pipe labels with "GAS" in blacklettering, at maximum 5 foot spacing.

J. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panelclosest to equipment.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC23 05 93 - 1

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of hydronic systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau:1. TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument.

C. Test Reports: Indicate data on forms prepared following ASHRAE 111. Submit data in S.I. units.

D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systemsand equipment to achieve specified performance.

E. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.

F. Furnish reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contentspage and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduceddrawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicatingthermostat locations.



B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing reportinclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.


A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standard.

B. Perform Work in accordance with ASHRAE 111.

[H11-00359]


C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

D. Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in thissection with minimum three years experience certified by TABB.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Work sequence.

B. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Entire hydronic system shall be balanced upon completion of renovation.

D. Balancing of air systems shall include all new systems and all existing systems that have beenmodified.

PART 2 EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following:1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition.2. HVAC control systems are installed complete and operable.3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final

filters.5. Fans are rotating correctly.6. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.7. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.8. Service and balancing valves are open.

2.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.

B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

2.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

[H11-00359]


2.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings tobe restored. Set and lock memory stops.

D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verifycorrecting adjustments have been made.

E. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance.

F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doorsto electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

2.5 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determineflow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balanceon temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in system.

C. Confirm air bleeds indicate system is full of water.

D. Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements priorto thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunctionwith air balancing.

E. Perform system balance with automatic control valves fully open triple duty valves fully open,and pump VFDs at 100 percent speed.

F. Confirm pump rotation and differential pressure at full flow.

G. Perform adjustment of water distribution systems by the following measures:1. Reduce total system flow rate first by reducing speed of VFD.2. Use balancing cocks, valves, and fittings.

H. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless designed for balancing and shut-offfunctions. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individualsystem parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.

2.6 SCHEDULES

A. Partial list of Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:1. Fintube radiation

[H11-00359]


B. Report Forms1. Title Page:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agencyb. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agencyc. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agencyd. Project namee. Project locationf. Project Architectg. Project Engineerh. Project Contractori. Project altitudej. Report date

2. Summary Comments:a. Design versus final performanceb. Notable characteristics of systemc. Description of systems operation sequenced. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurizatione. Nomenclature used throughout reportf. Test conditions

3. Instrument List:a. Instrumentb. Manufacturerc. Model numberd. Serial numbere. Rangef. Calibration date

4. Heating Coil Data:a. Identification/numberb. Locationc. Serviced. Manufacturere. Air flow, design and actualf. Water flow, design and actualg. Water pressure drop, design and actualh. Entering water temperature, design and actuali. Leaving water temperature, design and actualj. Entering air temperature, design and actualk. Leaving air temperature, design and actuall. Air pressure drop, design and actual

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

HVAC Insulation23 07 00 - 1

SECTION 23 07 00

HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’:1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:1. UL 1978 - Standard for Safety for Grease Ducts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials andthickness for each service, and location.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicatingproper installation procedures.


1.4 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three yearsexperience.



B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,including product density and thickness.

[H11-00359]


C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, bystoring in original wrapping.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products:1. CertainTeed.2. Knauf.3. Johns Manville.4. Owens-Corning.5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products:1. Aeroflex. Aerocell.2. Armacell, LLC. Armaflex.3. Nomaco. K-flex.4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 PIPE INSULATION1. See drawings for insulation Schedule.

2.3 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS

A. Vapor Retarder Jacket:1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.

B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet

material, off-white color.2. Thickness: 10 mil.3. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.

2.4 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.

C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.

D. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single piececonstruction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.

E. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

[H11-00359]


F. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.

2.5 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visiblelocations.

B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies havingfire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuinginsulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour.

C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible

connections, and expansion joints.2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied

jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Securefield-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations withvapor retarder mastic.

3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness asadjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

D. Glass Fiber Board Insulation:1. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten

insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface.

On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.3. Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface irregularities.

E. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch

expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacketand butt strips or both.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoiningpipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

3. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation atsuch locations.

F. Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F:1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch

expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacketand butt strips or both.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoiningpipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

3. Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.

G. Inserts and Shields:

[H11-00359]


1. Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipehanger and insulation.

2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping andunder finish jacket.a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching

adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned

temperature range and service.3. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield between roller

and inserts.

H. Insulation Terminating Points:1. Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water piping at union upstream of the

coil control valve.2. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation.

I. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:1. Push insulation on to piping.2. Miter joints at elbows.3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.

J. High Temperature Pipe Insulation:1. Install in multiple layers to meet thickness scheduled.2. Attach each layer with bands. Secure first layer with bands before installing next layer.3. Stagger joints between layers.4. Finish with canvas jacket.

K. Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valveswith insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass meshreinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottomside of horizontal piping.

2.6 SCHEDULES

A. See Drawings for schedules.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

HYRDONIC PIPING23 21 13 - 1

SECTION 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Heating water piping, above ground.2. Pipe hangers and supports.3. Valves.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product and execution requirements for

piping specialties used in heating and cooling piping systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.


A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system componentsand joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in opensystems.

B. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, andcouplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use directwelded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.

C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.1.

D. Use ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

E. Use globe or ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

F. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of hot water pumps.

G. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases ofvertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain.

H. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.

[H11-00359]


1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers

catalog information.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1 code for installation of piping systems andASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimumthree years experience.



B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place untilinstallation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sectionsof the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.



1.9 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

A. Steel Pipe: 2-1/2” and larger: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black.1. Fittings:

a. ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type.

[H11-00359]


b. Sch 40 victaulic2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

B. Copper Tubing: 2” and smaller: ASTM B88, Type L, drawn.1. Fittings:

a. ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.b. Propress fittings

2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled branch tube.3. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535

degrees F.

2.2 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded.2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered.3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder

end, water impervious isolation barrier.

B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger:1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges.2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges.

2.3 BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. NIBCO, Inc. Model.2. Stockham Valves & Fittings Model.3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, one piece bronze body, chrome plated brass ball, regularport, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends, lever handle.

2.4 PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. Model.2. Homestead Valve Model.3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 78, Class 150, semi-steel construction, round port, regularopening, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. Furnish one plug valve wrench forevery ten plug-valves with minimum of one wrench.

2.5 GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Crane Valve, North America Model.2. Milwaukee Valve Company Model.

[H11-00359]


3. NIBCO, Inc. Model.4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, threaded bonnet, handwheel, teflon composition disc, solder ends.

C. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 85, Class 125, cast iron body, bronze trim, hand wheel, outsidescrew and yoke, flanged ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and largermounted over 8 feet above floor.

2.6 CHECK VALVES

A. Horizontal Swing Check Valves:1. Manufacturers:

a. Milwaukee Valve Company Model.b. NIBCO, Inc. Model.c. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, bronze seat, teflon disc,solder or threaded ends.

3. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, cast iron body, bolted cap, bronze or castiron disc, flanged ends.

B. Spring Loaded Check Valves:1. Manufacturers:

a. Milwaukee Valve Company Model.b. NIBCO, Inc. Model.c. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

C. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, bronze body, in-line spring lift check, silent closing, teflondisc, integral seat, solder or threaded ends.

D. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, wafer style, cast iron body, bronze seat, centerguided bronze disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends.


A. Manufacturers:1. Michigan Hanger Co. Model.2. Superior Valve Co. Model.3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Conform to ASME B31.1.

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

D. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

[H11-00359]


F. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks.

H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

I. Floor Support for Hot Pipe 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

J. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper plated.

K. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

L. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connectionwith lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts tosuit threaded hanger rods.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems.


A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforcedconcrete beams.



E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt withrecessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.


A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.

[H11-00359]


B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movementwithout disengagement of supported pipe.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontalpiping.

G. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe hangers ortrapeze hangers.

H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces,pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulationand access to valves and fittings.

3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install heating water piping in accordance with ASME B31.1.

B. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 23 05 29.

F. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 22 05 53.

G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connectedequipment.

H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

I. Slope hydronic piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers tomaintain top of pipe aligned.

J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, andapply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

[H11-00359]


K. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer toSection 09 90 00.

L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

M. Insulate piping; refer to Section 23 07 00.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, andbalancing.

B. Test heating water piping system in accordance with ASME B31.9.

3.6 SCHEDULES

A. Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing:

PIPE SIZE

Inches

COPPERTUBING

MAXIMUM

HANGERSPACING

Feet

STEEL PIPE

MAXIMUM

HANGERSPACING

Feet

COPPERTUBING

HANGERROD

DIAMETER

Inches

STEEL PIPE

HANGERROD

DIAMETER

Inches

1/2 5 7 3/8 3/8

3/4 5 7 3/8 3/8

1 6 7 3/8 3/8

1-1/4 7 7 3/8 3/8

1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8

2 8 10 3/8 3/8

2-1/2 (Note 1) 9 11 1/2 1/2

3 10 12 1/2 1/2

4 12 14 1/2 5/8

5 13 16 1/2 5/8

6 14 17 5/8 3/4

B. Note 1: Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for grooved end piping systems.

[H11-00359]


C. Note 2: 20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for each pipe section close to jointbehind bell. Provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection. For pipesizes 6 inches and smaller, subjected to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, limitspan to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe.

END OF SECTION

[H11-00359]

GENERAL NOTES – ELECTRIAL Page 1 of 4

SECTION 26 00 00GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Provide electrical wiring as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, andas needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to:1. Minor electrical demolition related to architectural/mechanical demolition.2. Installation of a new 120/208-volt, three phase, four wire feeder to the new Elevator.3. New Elevator Wiring as detailed.4. Provide new LED light fixtures as indicated and specified on drawings.5. Provide motion sensor switches as shown.6. Provide fire alarm and telephone system connections, devices, and wiring as shown.

a. All new fire alarm equipment, devices, etc. shall be compatible with existing.

7. Installing branch circuit wiring for:a. Lighting Circuitsb. Receptacle Circuitsc. Circuits to Mechanical Equipmentd. Other Circuits as detailed

8. Installation of electrical equipment specified herein and in sections specifying relatedwork.

9. Electrical equipment and system testing, adjustments, marking, tagging, cleaning, painting,etc.


A. Codes, Standards and Regulations:1. Provide electrical equipment and wiring devices which have been UL listed and labeled2. Comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.3. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations,

the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the Architect/Engineer.1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings1. Submit shop drawings for approval before purchase on all items listed under the following

sections in Part Two - Products:

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS

A. General:1. All wiring shall be in conduit.2. Within the building conduit shall be electric metallic tubing.3. All conduit installed below grade shall be PVC, Heavy Duty, Schedule 40 conduit.

B. Electrical Metallic Tubing:

[H11-00359]


1. Electrical metallic tubing shall be hot-dip galvanized and manufactured in accordance withFederal Specification WWC563 and American Standards Institute (ANSI) specificationC80.3.

C. PVC Underground Conduit1. Schedule 40, rigid heavy wall polyvinyl chloride, 90 degrees, C., U.L. rated.

Connectors and couplings shall be solvent weld type.

2.2 RACEWAY FITTINGS

A. General - Fittings shall be suitable for the application and designed for the purpose for which theyare used.

B. Locknuts - Extra heavy, hot-dipped galvanized steel.

C. Conduit Supports - One hole type, hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron.

D. Electrical metallic tubing conduit fittings shall be set screw type. Cast body or indenter fittings arenot permitted.

E. Conduit Seal - Ferroalloy with cadmium zinc electroplate finish.

2.3 BOXES

A. Junction and Pull Boxes within building: Galvanized steel units with screwed-on covers, sized andlocated as per NEC370.

2.4 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Provide factory-fabricated wire of sizes, ratings, materials and types indicated here in and on thedrawings. All conductors shall be insulated for min. 75 degrees C. and a minimum of 600 volts. Allwire shall be copper conductors of the following types:1. General building Interior: Type THHN or THWN, suitable for operations of 600

volts as specified in the National Electric Code, at conductor temperatures not to exceed90degrees C. in dry locations. Conductors shall be annealed copper, insulated with high-heat and moisture resistant PVC, jacketed with abrasion, moisture, gasoline and oilresistant nylon.

2. Grounding conductorsa. Insulated green copper conductors only.

2.5 WIRING DEVICES

A. All wiring devices of a single type (switches, plates, receptacles, etc.) shall be of one manufacturerunless specified with manufacturer and model number. Devices shall be in accordance with theElectrical Symbol Legend.

B. Wall switches shall be Appleton, Bryant, Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, Leviton, Hubbell orPass & Seymour "AC Only" "Quite Switches" rated 20 amps, 120/277-volt, brown toggle handleswitches of the heavy-duty specification grade type meeting National ElectricalManufacturers Association (NEMA)WD1 2.03 through 2.06 "heavy-duty" performance

[H11-00359]


requirements, UL listed per UL 20 standards, and meeting Federal Specifications W-S-896E andW-S-896/2-02A.

C. Ground Fault Receptacles Hubbell industrial heavy duty specification grade GFCI Receptacle#GF5362, rated 20 amps (NEMA 520R), 120 Volts, with built-in Class A, Group 1, ground faultprotection. The receptacles shall be wired for end-of-line type configuration. Built-in test and resetbuttons shall be provided with visible ground trip indication. Receptacle shall include an allglass circuit board, and solid silver cadmium oxide control contacts with overlap design powercontacts. The receptacles shall be UL listed per UL Standard 498 and 943.

D. Cover Plates:1. Wall plates shall be Type A1S1 302 stainless steel. Where wiring devices are mounted in

multi-gang boxes, one-piece combination plates specifically manufactured for thecombination shall be provided.

2.6 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL BOARDS

A. Additions to existing Panels and main Switchboard shall be by the same manufacturer as existing

equipment.

2.7 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Motor circuit disconnect switches shall be Square D or approved equal heavy-duty fusible or nonfusible as required, in a NEMA 3R enclosure for outdoor applications (rated as recommended byequipment manufacturer). NEMA 1 type is acceptable for interior, dry locations.

2.8 MOTION SENSORS (For control of Lighting, Exhaust Fans, and Mechanical Equipment)

A. Sensors shall be wall or ceiling mounted, solid-state units with power supply and relay unit, suitablefor the environmental conditions in which installed. Include auxiliary contact for controllingadditional load.1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when area is occupied and off when

unoccupied. Set time delay to maximum for off time.

2. Sensor Type: Passive Infrared unless otherwise indicated.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Eaton / Cooper Controls.

b. Acuity Brands / Sensor Switch.

c. Hubbell.

2.9 GROUNDING MATERIALS

A. Equipment Grounding Conductors – Insulated, green in color, sized in accordance with the currentState of Michigan Electrical Code.

PART 3 EXECUTION

[H11-00359]


3.1 GENERALA. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, follow all guidelines and

requirements of OSHA and NFPA 70E.

B. Perform demolition work as shown on plans. Extend circuits as needed to maintain adjacent

devices, lights, etc. in service. Trace and verify all circuits prior to beginning demolition.

C. Provide as-built documentation of all work, including demolition and new work.

3.2 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGSA. Exposed conduit in building shall be installed in neat symmetrical lines parallel with the center

lines of the structure and adjacent to beams, walls, etc.

3.3 PULL BOXES

A. Install where necessary to terminate, tap off, or redirect multiple conduit runs. Locate so thatcovers are accessible after completion of construction. Support pull boxes independently ofconduits entering them.

3.4 WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINATING DEVICES

A. Splices will be permitted only in junction and outlet boxes. All splices shall be firmly bondedtogether and taped or shall be made with mechanical connectors.

B. Any splicing of dissimilar metals shall be rated as such. Use appropriate anti-oxidization paste orother approved method as recommended by manufacturer for locations of spices of dissimilarmetals.

3.5 DEVICE LOCATIONS

A. Wall Switches and Receptacles shall be mounted 48-inches above finished floor.

B. Disconnect switches shall be located so that the operators are not more than 48-inches above thefinished floor.

3.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Equipment Grounding - Motors, receptacles, lighting fixtures, etc. shall be grounded by means of aseparate green insulated equipment grounding conductor run in the conduit with the phaseconductors. The panel board shall be provided with a grounding bus for connection of equipmentgrounding conductors.

3.7 TESTING

A. All wiring shall be proof-tested for shorts, opens, and ground as a completed system.

END OF SECTION